NDA-24305
ISSUE 1
STOCK # 200813
®
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
OCTOBER, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,
Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC
America, Inc.
®
term®
NEAX and D
are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
i
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
Revision Sheet 1/5
NDA-24305
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
69
70
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
Revision Sheet 2/5
NDA-24305
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
Revision Sheet 3/5
NDA-24305
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
Revision Sheet 4/5
NDA-24305
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
297
298
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 7
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
Revision Sheet 5/5
NDA-24305
NDA-24305
ISSUE 1
OCTOBER, 2000
NEAX2400 IPX
ISDN Feature Programming Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CONFIGURATION OF THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER 2 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. BASIC KNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
MESSAGE SEQUENCES FOR LAYER 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
BEARER CAPABILITY (BC) INFORMATION ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CHAPTER 3 BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. ISDN LINE ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. ISDN TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. CALLING NUMBER PATTERN DATA (CNP) ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CHAPTER 4 COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2. COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ARTD: ASSIGNMENT OF ROUTE CLASS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CHAPTER 5 GATEWAY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ALTERNATE ROUTING-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT ASSURANCE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BOSS-SECRETARY TRANSFER-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
BOSS-SECRETARY OVERRIDE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CALL PICKUP-GROUP-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
NDA-24305
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Revision 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
CALL PICKUP-DIRECT-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CALL WAITING-TERMINATING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CALL PARK-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DISTINCTIVE RINGING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DATA LINE SECURITY-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
DATA INTERFACE-AUTOMATIC ANSWER-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
DATA TRANSPARENCY-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DATA UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING OF STATIONS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FAULTY TRUNK REPORT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
INDIALING THROUGH MAIN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
INTER-OFFICE OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LCR-AUTOMATIC OVERFLOW TO DDD-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LCR-CLOCKED MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
LAST NUMBER CALL-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-OUTSIDE-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LCR-SPECIAL LINE WARNING TONE-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
MUSIC ON HOLD-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MODEM POOLING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NIGHT CONNECTION-FLEXIBLE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
NON-DELAY OPERATION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE-SYSTEM-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
NAILED DOWN CONNECTION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-DELUXE-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
OVERFLOW-UCD-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
PEG COUNT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
PRIMARY CALL RESTRICTION-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
PAGING TRANSFER-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PRI FAILSAFE ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
RESTRICTION FROM OUTGOING CALLS-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
SPEED CALLING-STATION-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
SPEED CALLING-GROUP-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
SYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SMDR FOR DATA CALL-RS232C-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE-SYSTEM-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
STATION INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
TOLL DENIAL/TOLL DIVERSION-PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6-DIGIT-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
CHAPTER 6 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1. ISDN TERMINAL (5 ESS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2. ISDN TERMINAL (NATIONAL ISDN1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3. PRI STATION (H0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4. PRI STATION (H11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CALL REDIRECTION (FOR AT&T #4ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
DID ADDRESSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
NETWORK NAME DISPLAY (NI-2 PRI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
SID TO TERMINATING USER - DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SID TO TERMINATING USER - DTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SUB ADDRESS - ADDRESSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ACCUNET ACCESS154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
B-CHANNEL SERVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
CALL-BY-CALL POOL MANAGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
NDA-24305
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
Revision 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
NETWORKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
D-CHANNEL BACKUP - PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
MEGACOM ACCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
MEGACOM800 SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
SDN ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SUB ADDRESS - PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
WIDE BAND SWITCHING FOR AT&T #4ESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
NATIONAL - ISDN2 - PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
VIRTUAL TIE LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIG TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
CNIP/CONP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Page
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Message Sequences for Layer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ATRK for 24PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ATRK for 24DTR + 2DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Calling Number When Interworking with FCCS Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Typical Modem-to-Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Modem Pool to Modem Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Asynchronous DTE Connected to a Data Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example of SMDR Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Assigning Transfer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Connection Patterns for UUS Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
NDA-24305
LIST OF FIGURES
Page v
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF FIGURES
Page vi
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
LIST OF TABLES
Table
Title
Page
Gateway Service List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ACD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ISDN Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Supplementary Service List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Reference: Output Layer 1 Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
NDA-24305
LIST OF TABLES
Page vii
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF TABLES
Page viii
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 1
1. GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
The ISDN System Data Design Manual provides general information for ISDN, office data design for ISDN,
and ISDN service.
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL
2.1 CONFIGURATION OF THIS MANUAL
This manual is comprised as follows.
CHAPTER 2 GENERAL INFORMATION
1. GENERAL
2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
3. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
CHAPTER 3 BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
1. ISDN LINE ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT
2. ISDN TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT
3. CALLING NUMBERPATTERN DATA (CNP) ASSIGNMENT
CHAPTER 4 COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
1. GENERAL
2. COMMANDS
CHAPTER 5 GATEWAY SERVICE
CHAPTER 6 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
1. ISDN Terminal (5 ESS)
2. ISDN Terminal (National ISDN1)
3. PRI station (H0)
4. PRI station (H11)
APPENDIX A ISDN FEATURE IN FUSION NETWORK
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 1
Page 2
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 2
1. GENERAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains basic office data assignment procedures for ISDN and describes ISDN service features.
2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The system provides PRT as a primary rate ISDN interface. DTI with DCH is available also. The hardware con-
NT2
NT1
PBX
TE1
T
ILC
PRT
DSU
ISDN
DTI
DCH
TE2
Dterm
ELC
LC
DP/PB
G3FAX
NT1: Network Termination 1
NT2: Network Termination 2
TE1 : ISDN Terminal Equipment
TE2: Non ISDN Terminal Equipment
DSU: Digital Service Unit
AT I
PLO
ATTCON
DA: Data Adapter
PC: Personal Computer with V.24
Figure 2-1 Hardware Configuration
Table 2-1 Hardware
HARDWARE
SYMBOL
REMARKS
PRT
DCH
DTI
PA-24PRTB-A
PA-2DCHA
ISDN primary rate Interface
D-channel Handler
PA-24DTR
Digital trunk interface
Phase Lock Oscillator
ISDN Terminal Equipment
PLO
ILC
PA-CK16-A/17-A
PA-8ILCG
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 2
Page 3
Revision 1.0
GENERAL INFORMATION
3. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
3.1 MESSAGE SEQUENCES FOR LAYER 3
State of
Originating
User Side
State of Network
State of
Terminating
User Side
OG Side
IC Side
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
SETUP
SETUP
CALL PROC
ALERT/PROG
CONN
Call Initiated
(1)
Call Initiated
(1)
Call Present
(6)
Call Present
(6)
CALL PROC
OG call
Proceeding
(3)
OG call
Proceeding
(3)
IC call
Proceeding
(9)
IC call
Proceeding
(9)
ALERT/PROG
Call Delivered
(4)
Call Delivered
(4)
Call Received
(7)
Call Received
(7)
Connect
Request
(8)
Connect
Request
(8)
CONN
CONN ACK
CONN ACK
Active
(10)
Active
(10)
Active
(10)
Active
(10)
DISC
REL
DISC
REL
Disconnect
Request
(11)
Release
Request
(19)
Disconnect
Indication
(12)
Release
Request
(19)
Disconnect
Request
(11)
Disconnect
Indication
(12)
RELCOM
RELCOM
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
Null
(0)
Note 1: <Call established message>
ALERT: Alerting
CALL PROC: Call Proceeding
CONN: Connect
<Call clearing message>
DISC:
Disconnect
REL:
Release
RELCOM:
Release Complete
CONN ACK: Connect Acknowledge
PROGRESS: Progress
SETUP:
Setup
Note 2: The number in ( ) shows Call state value for User or Network.
Figure 2-2 Message Sequences for Layer3
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 2
Page 4
Revision 1.0
GENERAL INFORMATION
3.2 BEARER CAPABILITY (BC) INFORMATION ELEMENT
The purpose of the Bearer Capability (BC) information element is to indicate a bearer service to be provided by
the network (ISDN). It contains only information which may be used by the network.
The Bearer Capability information element is used for compatibility checking in the connection as well as Low
Layer (LLC)/High Layer (HLC) Capability.
The following shows the relation between a terminal and BC.
Kind of Terminal
Analog single line telephone
BC
Speech
term
Digital telephone (D
G3 (Group 3) Fax
Modem
)
Speech
3.1 kHz audio
3.1 kHz audio
Unrestricted digital
Unrestricted digital
DTE via Data Module/Adaptor
G4 (Group 4) Fax
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 2
Page 5
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 2
Page 6
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 3
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
1. ISDN LINE ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT
To initiate seizure of an outgoing trunk, one of four methods - OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS - can be used in the
system. Among the four methods, however, “LCR” method alone can access an ISDN line. For this reason, be
sure to assign “LCR” as “Kind of service (SRV)” in the ASPA command. The following explains how to
program LCR data.
STEP 1: ANPD - Assign the first digit of the LCR access code for the ISDN line.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign the LCR access code for a dummy route number.
- Any dummy route number can be used if the route number is not duplicated.
- When Sub Address Dialing is desired, assign SUB=1. (Refer to Feature “SUB ADDRESS
- PRESENT”)
- An example “Sub Address Dialing” from a station is shown below.
9-00-81-35463-1111-*5650#
- International
Access Code
- Country Code
(CC)
Sub Address (SA)
- Subscriber
Number (SN)
ISDN Address
ISDN trunk access code (LCR)
- A station user may dial the Sub Address when he/she uses the ISDN trunk access code
with SUB=1. The call will be originated after Register Inter Digit Timer value if the
station user does not dial Sub Address.
- The Register Inter Digit Timer is determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 129. (Default data =
6 seconds.)
STEP 3: AMND- Assign the Maximum Necessary Digits (MND) for each Area/Office code (DC).
- DC must include ISDN trunk access code and ISDN address but not a Sub Address (SA).
- Analog/Digital Line Data (A/D) must be assigned as data 1 (Digital) for the DC which
includes ISDN trunk access code.
A/D = 1
STEP 4: ARNP - Assign the ISDN trunk access code to the ISDN Bch route number, but not a dummy route
number.
STEP 5: ARTD - Assign the following CDN data for the dummy route number.
TCL (CDN 6) = 1 or 4 (depending on the requirement)
L/T (CDN 7) = 1
AC (CDN 13) = 1
- The other CDNs may be left at default value (data 0) for the dummy route.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 3
Page 7
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
STEP 6: AFRS - Assign Number Pattern Code (NPC) and Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR)
for the dummy route number.
- NPC may include ISDN trunk access code and ISDN address but not a Sub Address (SA).
- OPR is a kind of intermediator between AFRS andAOPR. Therefore any number may be
used from 1 through 4000. (Be careful not to assign duplicated OPR.)
STEP 7: AOPR - Assign ISDN Bch route number to the OPR which has been assigned in the AFRS
command.
- Since the system should transmit only ISDN address, skip the ISDN trunk access code.
- Route advance is available by programming RA, E andRT. OVFT is also available.
- ACMO is available with programming PNL.
- ATCP and/or ASDC is available with programming TDPTN.
STEP 8: ARSC - Assign RSC that allows RRIs for both ISDN Bch trunk route and the dummy route but not
for ISDN Dch trunk route.
Note: For the Bearer Capability (BC) in ISDN;
Caller should provide the following service class data
ASFC - SFI48 = 1 (for 3.1 kHz audio) ---- Group 3 Fax. Modem
SFI48 = 0 (for speech)
CHAPTER 3
Page 8
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
2. ISDN TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the following indexes.
SYSl Index 91:
Single PLO b7 b6 b5 b4
0
1
0
1
Dual PLOs b7 b6 b5 b4
1
1
1
1
SYSl Index 186:
CCIS/ISDN in service b6 b6
1 0 (When b6=1, ISDN service is invalid.)
SYSl Index 187:
SYSl Index 220:
always 00 (hex)
ISDN is in service
For BRI Type of Interface
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the route data for both Bch and Dch.
Data for Bch/ Data for Dch
2 - ONSG : 2/2
7 - L/T : 1/1
28 - ANS : 1/1
34 - GUARD : 1/0
4 - INSG : 2/2
8 - RLP : 2/2
30 - PAD : 4/7
45 - A/D : 1/0
5 - TF : 3/0
6 - TCL : 1/1
10 - SMDR : 1/0
31 - OGRL : 1/0
50 - DPLY : 1/0
15 - LSG : 12/13
32 - ICRL : 1/0
63 - LYER1 : 0
The other data should be “0” (default data).
Note 1: INT (CDN65):
1 N-ISDN2
2 Australia
3 INS 1500
4 ITU (CCITT), ETSI
5 AT&T (#4/#5 ESS)
6 INS 64
7 NT DMS 100 / DMS 250
8 Not used
9 TTC Q931a protocol Tie Line (Japan)
10 Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172)/IS-11572
6.)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 3
Page 9
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
STEP 3: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Bch only here. Note that the data assignment for Dch must be
performed after the ACSC command assignment.
- How Bch and Dch LEN appear in PIM is shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.
- As seen from those Figures, the number of B-channels and D-channels are:
24 PRT (B channel × 23, D channel × 2)
- Regarding the route number of the Bch assigned by the ARTD command, assign the Bch’s
trunk number and Line Equipment Number (LEN).
Assignment” for others.
CHAPTER 3
Page 10
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
Level
Slot
Dch
Bch 23
1
LV 7
6
5
Group
n+3
4
3
2
1
LV 0
LV 7
6
5
Group
n+2
4
3
2
1
Note
Slot x
Note
Slot y
Level
LV 0
Bch 8
Dch
1
LV 7
LV 7
7
Bch 23
22
6
6
6
5
5
Odd
Number
Group
5
21
4
4
Group
n+1
4
20
3
3
3
2
19
2
2
18
1
1
Bch 1
Bch 1
17
LV 0
LV 0
16
LV 7
LV 7
15
6
6
14
5
5
Even
Number
Group
Group
n
13
4
4
12
3
2
3
2
11
10
1
1
Dch 2
Dch 2
Bch
9
LV 0
LV 0
IF 16 PORTS/SLOT
IF 32 PORTS/SLOT
Note 1: Slot x and Slot y must be in the same HW.
Note 2: The even-numbered module group, Unit 0, Group 0 cannot be assigned as Dch LEN data.
Figure 3-1 ATRK for 24PRT
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 3
Page 11
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
•
When #0 DCH of 2DCH card is used.
Level
Slot
Slot
Dch
Bch 23
1
LV 7
6
5
Group
n+3
4
3
2
1
LV 0
LV 7
6
5
Group
n+2
4
3
2
1
Note
Slot x
Note
Slot y
Level
Slot
Dch
2
LV 0
Bch 8
Dch
1
LV 7
LV 7
7
Bch 23
22
6
6
6
5
5
Odd
Number
Group
5
21
4
4
Group
n+1
4
20
3
3
3
2
19
2
2
18
1
1
Bch
1
Bch 1
17
LV 0
LV 0
16
LV 7
LV 7
15
6
6
14
5
5
Even
Number
Group
Group
n
13
4
4
12
3
2
3
2
11
10
1
1
Dch
2
Bch
9
LV 0
LV 0
IF 16 PORTS/SLOT
IF 32 PORTS/SLOT
Note 1: Slot x and Slot y must be in the same HW.
Note 2: The even-numbered module group, Unit 0, Group 0 cannot be assigned as Dch LEN data.
Figure 3-2 ATRK for 24DTR + 2DCH
STEP 4: ADPC-Assign Point Code for both Bch route and Dch route.
- The values for a Point Code is 1 through 16383. You can assign any number as the Point
Code for them, however, do not duplicate the Point Code which is used for No. 7 CCIS.
CHAPTER 3
NDA-24305
Page 12
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
STEP 5: ACSC - Assign Dch and Bch location for CSCG.
- The values for CSCG is 130 through 255.
- Even number CSCGs are used for Dch location and odd number CSCGs are used for Bch
location. Although Bch location is the same as Dch location when PRT is used.
- CCH, which represents Dch and Bch location, is assigned as shown below.
CCH: XX X XX
Group (00 - 23)
Unit (0 - 3)
Module Group (00 - 07)
- CCH must be assigned as the first group in the highway to which PRT is mounted.
- CCH=00000 is prohibited.
- Assign the same LEN in CIC GROUP (0~7) for a CSCG when PRT is used for 23B+D
- Examples of ACSC assignment are shown below.
00-03
04
01
00
05
03
02
06
05
04
07
07
06
08
09
08
09
11
10
HW0
HW1
HW2
(1) Condition: When 24PRT is mounted in Slot 07 of PIM0, ACSC data is as follows.
CSCG
CCH
CIC GROUP
CSCG
CCH
CIC GROUP
130
(for Dch)
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
131
(for Bch)
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note: The location of DCH (Dch Handler) which is built in PRT must be assigned in the parameter “CCH” of
this command.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 3
Page 13
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
(2) Condition: 24DTR is mounted in Slot 07 of PIM0 and 2DCH is mounted in Slot 05 of
PIM0, ACSC data is as follows.
CSCG
CCH
CIC GROUP
CSCG
CCH
CIC GROUP
130
(for Dch)
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
131
(for Bch)
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note 1: The location of DCH (Dch Handler) must be assigned in the “CCH” parameter of this command.
Note 2: Above is an example when #0 DCH of PA-2DCH circuit card is used.
STEP 6: ACIC1 - With respect to PC assigned in the ADPC command, assign CSCG of the Dch assigned in
the ACSC command.
STEP 7: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Dch referring to Figure 3-1 and 3-2.
STEP 8: MBTK - Cancel Make Busy Status of all B channels in the PRT card.
Note: Circuit card must be initialized after this assignment.
CHAPTER 3
NDA-24305
Page 14
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
3. CALLING NUMBER PATTERN DATA (CNP) ASSIGNMENT
Calling party number can be transmitted included in the ISDN messages through ISDN network. This function
provides the PBX user with a variety of ISDN services. This section describes some conditions for programming
Example)
Node B
Node A
Destination's
number
03-3454-1111
ISDN
ISDN
FCCS
network
network
RT=6, LGRT=16
RT=3, LGRT=13 Calling party number
0471-81-1969
Note
Station A (600000)
DID no. : 0471-81-1969
Station B (610000)
DID no. : 0297-74-1234
Note: Since Station A originates a call via the ISDN line established in Node A in this example, the calling
.
party number to be received by the destination station is the DID No. programmed at Node A.
Figure 3-3 Calling Number When Interworking with FCCS Link
(1) This data should be assigned at NCN.
(2) Calling Number Pattern (CNP) for the outgoing call (CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION) and that for the
incoming call (SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT) should be separated.
(3) The services to be related with this feature are shown below.
•
•
CALL PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE (DIRECT-IN-TERMINATION)
CALL PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE (CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/
DON’T ANSWER)
•
SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/SID TO NETWORK-PRIVACY
PROGRAMMING
ACNPN and ACNDN command must be used in pairs. The use of other pairs, for example ACNP and ACNDN,
is not recommended.
(1) Originating from the non-ISDN terminal
STEP 1: ACNPN - Apply the Calling Number Pattern number to the logical route to be provided SID to
Network-Present.
OG/IC=O (Outgoing Call; SID to Network-Present)
LGRT=the route used for SID to Network -Present
CNP=Calling Number Pattern (1~1023)
* The detail for the pattern is programmed with the ACNDN command.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 3
Page 15
Revision 1.0
BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT FOR ISDN
STEP 2: ACNDN- Assign the number of digits to be added to or omitted from the calling party number data
for each Calling Number Pattern programmed in ACNPN.
CNP=Calling Number Pattern assigned with ACNPN command.
SKIP=the number of digits to be skipped.
ADD=the number of digits to be added.
DC=the number to be skipped or added.
Note: Do not assign “0” at both “SKIP” and “ADD” parameter.
[Example Data]
Programmed Data
ACNPN: OG=O, LGRT=2, CNP=2
ACNDN: CNP=2, SKIP=0, ADD=6, DC=047182
In this case, 0471-82-4211, the DID number for the station (station no. 511), is sent to the terminating node.
PBX
PBX
Bch (LGRT=2)
PRT
FCCS
Station 511
DID no.: 0471-82-4211
ISDN Network
“0471-82-4211” is received.
(2) Originating from the ISDN terminal
STEP 1: ACNPN- Apply the Calling Number Pattern data to the logical route to be provided SID to Network-
Present.
OG/IC=O (Outgoing Call; SID to Network-Present)
LGRT=the route for SID to Network -Present
CNP=Calling Number Pattern (1~1023)
*The detail for the pattern is programmed with the ACNDN command.
STEP 2: ACNDN- Assign the Calling Number data.
CNP=Calling Number Pattern assigned with ACNPN command.
SKIP=the number of digits to be skipped.
ADD=the number of digits to be added.
DC=the number to be skipped or added.
[Example Data]
Programmed Data
ACNPN: OG=O, LGRT=2, CNP=2
ACNDN: CNP=2, SKIP=0, ADD=6, DC=047182
When ISDN terminal 222 (DID no. is 0471-82-3665)
originates a call
DID no. of ISDN terminal 222 is sent
When ISDN terminal 221 (DID no. is not assigned)
originates a call
DID no. assigned to the ILC port no. 222 is sent
PBX
PBX
Bch (LGRT=2)
DID no.
FCCS
0471-82-3664
Port no.
220
PRT
ISDN network
ISDN terminal Calling party number
ILC
221
222
0471-82-3664
0471-82-3665
ISDN 222 221
Terminal
DID no. is not assigned
DID no. of Station 222 is 0471-82-3665
CHAPTER 3
NDA-24305
Page 16
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 4
1. GENERAL
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
This chapter explains commands concerning ISDN. Commands explained in Chapter 3, “Basic Data
Assignment for ISDN” are not included in this chapter.
•
•
•
•
ASYD: Assignment of System Data
ASFC: Assignment of Service Feature Class Data
ARTD: Assignment of Route Class Data Note
ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data
Note
Note
Note: This chapter covers only Index (data) related to ISDN.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 4
Page 17
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
2. COMMANDS
2.1 ASYD: ASSIGNMENT OF SYSTEM DATA
BIT CORRE-
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00-FF
(Hex)
SPONDING
DATA
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0-511
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
0
b0
b1
Not used
Table Development:
Common or Separate
Day/Night Data Tables.
Same Number Special Access Code
Data (ASPS command)
0/1 = Common/Separate
Note: When data
tables are
b2
Call Forwarding Service by Calling
Number Data (AFCP command)
0/1 = Common/Separate
designated as
“Common”,
the Day mode
designation
must be used
in the
76
0
0
0
0
0
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Not used
respective
commands.
b0
0/1 = Link Re-Connection Not Involved/Link Re-Connection
Involved
Note: An Interoffice transfer service is available. For example,
with No. 7 CCIS, a caller has called outside their own
office but is actually talking with somebody in their own
office. This bit is used to reconfigure links so they are not
wasted in call transfer service.
1
b1
Restriction check based on the caller’s restriction class when the
outgoing trunk is using the No. 7 CCIS in a tandem connection.
0/1 = No Check/Check
186
0
0
b2
b3
b4
0/1 = -/No. 7 CCIS Loop-Back Test in progress
Not used
Serial Call-Loop Release:
0/1 = Out (CCSA key)/In Service (No CCSA key)
b5
Clearing of the buffer memory for use in the centralized
management report (For CCIS).
0/1 = not necessary/necessary
b
CCIS or ISDN:
6
0/1 = Out/In Service
b7
Centralized IC Billing Office Code:
0/1 = Ineffective/Effective
187
00
Data Bus used for CCIS/ISDN cards (Assign 00 Hex)
CHAPTER 4
Page 18
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
BIT CORRE-
SPONDING
DATA
SYSTEM
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0-511
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00-FF
(Hex)
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
b
b
b
b
b
Protocol of ISDN Terminal (BRI station)
0
1
2
3
4
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Japan (INS64)
U.S.A. (5ESS)
Australia (TPH 1962)
Not used
Not used
N-ISDN1
6-15: Not used
220
RA (Rate Adaptation) for ISDNTerminal
0: RA designated by ADA2 command
1: V.110/X.30
b
5
2: Not used
3: Not used
b
b
b
ISDN service (When Index 186 bit 6 = 1)
0/1 = In Service/Out of Service
6
7
0
0
1
ISDN Trunk Layer 3 Timer
0/1 = Stop/Activate
Note 1
Call Forwarding Service by Calling
Number Data (“AFCP” command)
Separate or Common
Tenant Data Table
development for the
respective commands
0/1 = Separate/
0
0
0
0
0
0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
Common
226
Note: When data “1”
is assigned, data
must be assigned
for Tenant 1 (TN
= 1) in the
Not used
respective
commands.
0
b7
Note 1: Normally assign “0”. (Only specific service needs data “1” in this bit.)
Related Layer3 Timer: T303, T310, T313.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 4
Page 19
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
BIT CORRE-
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
DATA
TYPE
DATA
(DATA)
00-FF
(Hex)
SPONDING
DATA
DATA
INDEX
(INDEX)
0-511
SYSTEM DATA CONTENTS
DATA
BIT
(SYS)
0/1
0
b0-b6 Not used
230
b
Timing for receiving or sending ISDN/CCIS message.
0/1 = 32 ms/128 ms
7
Maximum Digits for Call Forwarding External Restriction (for
Australia only)
b0-b3
0: 12 digits A:
10 digits
11 digits
1-8: 8 digits
9: 9 digits
B:
C-F: 12 digits
0
0
b4
Not used
248
b
Malicious call (ISDN) Service
0/1 = Out/In Service
5
b6
b7
Not used
Tone to be sent out when the handset has been lifted off-hook at
the station on which C.F.-All Calls service is set.
0/1 = Dial Tone (DT)/Special Dial Tone (SPDT)
1
T321 Timer (SERV ACK receiving Timer)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
MTC
478
479
Timer Value = MTC x 1 sec.
(Default data 00 Hex: 30 sec.)
Timer for Dch Back u p
Waiting Timer for a changeover when an ACT Dch detects Layer
2 down in a self or facing office.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
MTC
Timer Value = MTC x 1sec.
(Default data 00 Hex: 0 sec.)
Note 1: Available in Australia and U.A.E.
Note 2: For AT&T/Northern Telecom in U.S.A.
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24305
Page 20
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
2.2 ASFC: ASSIGNMENT OF SERVICE FEATURE CLASS DATA
SFI 31:
SFI 48:
SFI 94:
For SID to Terminating User-DTE
0
1
=
=
–
SID to Terminating User-DTE
For Bearer Service
0
1
=
=
Speech
3.1 KHz Audio (Modem, G3 Fax)
For SID to Network - Privacy [CLIR]
0
1
=
=
–
SID to Network - Privacy
SFI 175: For Advice of Charge (AOC) - Receipt and Display of AOC from a Foreign Q-SIG NETWORK
0
1
=
=
Out of Service
In Service
2.3 ARTD: ASSIGNMENT OF ROUTE CLASS DATA
H1 (CDN96)
ISDN H1 Switching
0
1
= –
= In Service
CI (CDN98)
ISDN transmitting information
0
1
= –
= 16-Digit Caller Number service, Attribute Information Notification service
(BC, LLC, HLC) and Calling Sub-Address Transfer service
2-15 = –
ADVPRA (CDN111) ISDN PRI Failure Routing Service
0
1
= –
= In Service
Note: This data is valid for dummy routes.
CMRT (CDN115) Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks
0
1
= –
= In Service
BOB (CDN118) Broad Band
0
1
= 64K
= N × 64K
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 4
Page 21
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
2.4 ARTI: ASSIGNMENT OF TRUNK APPLICATION DATA
RST (CDN1)
Assignment of Restart
0
1
2
3
= Restart Send per Individual Channel
= –
= –
= Restart not Send
HMT (CDN2)
When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
TRCRST (CDN3) Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element
0
1
= No restriction
= Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, Restricted digital and Video data calls are
restricted.)
2
= Speech call restriction (Speech, 3.1 KHz audio and 7KHz audio calls are restricted.)
3-15 = –
TRSRST (CDN4) Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element
0
1
2
3
= No restriction
= 384 kbps (H0) call is restricted
= 1536 kbps (H11)/1920 kbps (H12) call is restricted
= 384 kbps and 1536 (H11)/1920 (H12) kbps calls are restricted
4-15 = –
T309LNK (CDN5) Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure
0
1
2
3
= Layer 2 Alarm with T309 is Disabled
= Layer 2 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled
= Layer 2 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled
= –
T309CON (CDN6)Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure
0
1
2
3
= Layer 1 Alarm with T309 is Disabled
= Layer 1 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled
= Layer 1 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled
= –
LLCRST (CDN7) Call restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element
= No restriction
0
Note 1: User rate value is based on ITU-T Q-931.
DTRT (CDN11) Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm)
0
1
= –
= Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal as a Layer 1 alarm
TMPRT (CDN12) Temporary Route Information over CCIS
0
1
= –
= In CCIS, the route information can be transferred by the call control messages.
Moreover, the call restriction can be checked referring to this route information.
CHAPTER 4
Page 22
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
Clear call when DTI alarm is detected.
IRL (CDN15)
0
1
= –
Note 2: This data should be set when there is no Dch in the physical DTI.
MTC (CDN16)
Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Restoration timer (TC×MTC) sec.
0-15 = TC (CDN18) × MTC (Restart timer value)
TC (CDN17)
Timer T309 Counter Value
0
1
2
3
= –4
= 64 msec.5
= – 6
=
=
=
=
30sec.
5 min.
1 sec.
–
= 2 sec.7
DVRST (CDN20) Call restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN.
0
1
2
= No Restriction
= Speech call restriction (Speech. 3.1 kHz audio, 7 kHz audio calls are restricted.)
= Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, restricted digital and Video data are
restricted.)
3
= Both Speech and Data calls are restricted.
0
1
= No Restriction
= Restriction
Note 3: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.
0
1
= –
= Effective
Note 4: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.
0/1 = Out of Service/In Service
Note 5: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.
STSENQ (CDN24) Status Inquiry Message Send Note 6
0/1 = Out of Service/In Service
Note 6: This data is not effective in Australia.
RETMSG (CDN30) Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE with Analog Trunk
0
1
= CALL PROC. + ALERT
= CALL PROC. + ALERT or CALL PROC. + PROGRESS
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 4
Page 23
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
ANI (CDN31)
Timing to demand ANI Information
= There is no ANI demand at Incoming call
= After receiving 1st digit
= After receiving 2nd digit
= After receiving 3rd digit
= After receiving 4th digit
= After receiving 5th digit
= After receiving 6th digit
= After receiving 7th digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SRV (CDN32)
Bit0: Advice of Charge (AOC)
0 = Valid
1 = Invalid
Bit1: Malicious Call Trace (MCT)/Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
0 = Valid
1 = Invalid
Bit2-Bit6: –
Bit7: For TON (CDN28) and/or NPI (CDN29)
0 = Invalid
1 = Valid
Note 7: Input this data by a decimal.
TON (CDN33)
= Unknown
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
= International Number
= National Number
= Network Special Number
= Subscriber Number
= –
= Abbreviated Number
= Reserved for Extension
Note 8: This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1.
NPI (CDN34)
= Unknown
= ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan
= –
= Data Numbering Plan
= Telex Numbering Plan
0
1
2
3
4
5-7 = –
8
9
= National Standard Numbering Plan
= Private Numbering Plan
10-14 =–
15 = Reserved for Extension
Others =–
Note 9: This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and ARTI SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1.
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24305
Page 24
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
L/T (CDN35)
Local/Toll Note 10
= Local
= Toll
0
1
Note 10:Only for Russia
ECCIS (CDN36) Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS) for the public ISDN Line
0/1 = Out of Service/In Service
ECCISTM (CDN37) Release timer for E-CCIS Line
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
= 3 minutes (Default setting)
= 15 seconds
= 30 seconds
= 1 minute
= 2 minutes
= 5 minutes
= 10 minutes
= 15 minutes
= 30 minutes
= 1 hour
10-13 = Not used
14
15
= Immediately after call completion
= Not released
ECCISOB (CDN38) OG Billing for E-CCIS Line
0/1 = Out of Service/In Service
ECCISIB (CDN39) IC Billing for E-CCIS Line
0/1 = Out of Service/In Service
SPMET (CDN40) Meter Pulse Observation Control
0
1
2
3
= –
= Low to High Transition
= High to Low Transition
= Low to High & High to Low Transition
ECCISTD (CDN42) Addressing Information used in E-CCIS
0
1
= Called DID Number
= Called Sub Address
MFCG2 (CDN43) Calling Party Category
0
1
= Subscriber with Priority
= Subscriber without Priority
OPCC (CDN44)
0/1
Optimal Call Control
= In Service/Out of Service
INTD (CDN47)
= Q-SIG
= IS-11572
0
1
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 4
Page 25
Revision 1.0
COMMANDS CONCERNING ISDN DATA ASSIGNMENT
0/1
= Out of Service/In Service
0
1
2
3
= Fixed Channel System
= Common Channel System
= Not used
= Not used
Note 11:Valid since Series 7300 Release 4.
CTCF (CDN52)
0/1
= Out of Service/In Service
Note 12:Valid since Series 7400 Release 8.
RERT (CDN53)
Note 13:Valid since Series 7400 Release 8.
For the other CDNs in trunk application data, zero (0) should always be entered.
CHAPTER 4
NDA-24305
Page 26
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 5
GATEWAY SERVICE
This chapter explains data assignment for ISDN gateway service. Refer to ISDN Features and Specifications for
availability of each Gateway Service on the Fusion Network.
Table 5-1 Gateway Service List (1/4)
SERVICE
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE FEATURE NAME
REMARKS
Alternate Routing-PRI
Automatic Call Distribution-PRI
Announcement Service-PRI
Automatic Circuit Assurance-PRI
Automatic Trunk Test-PRI
Boss-Secretary Transfer-PRI
Boss-Secretary Override-PRI
Call Forwarding-All Calls-PRI
term
Call Forwarding-All Calls-D -PRI
Call Forwarding-Busy Line-PRI
Call Pickup-Group-PRI
term
Call Pickup-Group-D
-PRI
Call Transfer-Attendant-PRI
Call Transfer-All Calls-PRI
term
Call Transfer-All Calls-D -PRI
Consultation Hold-All Calls-PRI
term
Consultation Hold-All Calls-D -PRI
Call Forwarding-Intercept/Announcement-PRI
Call Pickup-Direct-PRI
Call Waiting-Terminating-PRI
Call Park-PRI
Call Forwarding-All Calls-Announcement-PRI
Call Forwarding-Intercept-PRI
Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer-PRI
Distinctive Ringing-PRI
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 27
Revision 1.0
GATEWAY SERVICE
Table 5-1 Gateway Service List (2/4)
SERVICE
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE FEATURE NAME
REMARKS
term
Do Not Disturb-D -PRI
Data Line Security-PRI
Data Privacy on Demand-PRI
Data Interface-Automatic Answer-PRI
Data Transparency-PRI
Data Communications-PRI
Data Uniform Numbering Plan-PRI
Direct-In Termination (DIT)-PRI
term
Elapsed Time Display-D
-PRI
Flexible Numbering of Stations-PRI
Faulty Trunk Report-PRI
term
Hands-Free Answer Back-D
Hot Line-Outside-PRI
-PRI
Incoming Call Identification-PRI
Incoming ISDN Call to Tie Line Connection-PRI
Indialing Through Main-PRI
Inter-PBX Coordinated Station Numbering Plan-PRI
ISDN Individual Calling Line Identification (ICLID)
Inter-Office Off-Hook Queuing-PRI
Least Cost Routing-3/6-Digit-PRI
LCR-Time of Day Routing-PRI
LCR-Attendant Manual Override-PRI
LCR-Automatic Overflow to DDD-PRI
LCR-Clocked Manual Override-PRI
Last Number Call-PRI
term
Last Number Called-D
-PRI
LDN Night Connection-PRI
CHAPTER 5
Page 28
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
GATEWAY SERVICE
REMARKS
Table 5-1 Gateway Service List (3/4)
SERVICE FEATURE NAME
SERVICE
FEATURE
CODE
LDN Night Connection-Outside-PRI
LCR-Special Line Warning Tone-PRI
Miscellaneous Trunk Access-PRI
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction-PRI
Music On Hold-PRI
Modem Pooling-PRI
Multiple Call Forwarding-All Calls-PRI
Night Connection-Fixed-PRI
Night Connection-Flexible-PRI
Non-Delay Operation-PRI
Night Connection Outside-System-PRI
Nailed Down Connection-PRI
Outgoing Trunk Queuing-PRI
Outgoing Trunk Queuing-Deluxe-PRI
Off-Hook Queuing-PRI
Outgoing Trunk Queuing-Attendant-PRI
Overflow-UCD-PRI
Peg Count-PRI
Primary Call Restriction-PRI
PRI Trunk to Tie Line Connection with Pad Control
Paging Transfer-PRI
PRI Failsafe Routing
Restriction from Outgoing Calls-PRI
Speed Calling-System-PRI
term
Speed Calling-System-D
-PRI
Station Message Detail Recording System-RS232C-PRI
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 29
Revision 1.0
GATEWAY SERVICE
Table 5-1 Gateway Service List (4/4)
SERVICE FEATURE NAME
SERVICE
FEATURE
CODE
REMARKS
Speed Calling-Station-PRI
Speed Calling-Group-PRI
Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission-PRI
Synchronous Data Switching-PRI
SMDR for Data Call-RS232C-PRI
Speed Calling Override-System-PRI
Station Individual Trunk Access-PRI
Tandem Switching of Tie Trunk-2/4-Wire-PRI
Three-Way Calling-PRI
term
Three-Way Calling-D
-PRI
Toll Denial/Toll Diversion-PRI
Toll Restriction-3/6-Digit-PRI
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) -PRI
CHAPTER 5
Page 30
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
ALTERNATE ROUTING-PRI
A-76
ALTERNATE ROUTING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature is provided with LCR which automatically routes ISDN outgoing on-net calls over alternate
facilities when the first-choice trunk group is busy. The user selects the first-choice route by dialing the
corresponding access code, and the equipment then routes the call through alternate trunk groups only if the first
is busy. The PBX will also add or delete digits, when necessary, to complete the call to the desired station.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: Assign “ISDN Line Access Code” data referring to Chapter 3, “Basic Data Assignment for ISDN”
and the data for the alternate trunk access.
Note: STEP 7: AOPR - Assign ISDN Bch route number and the alternate route number to
the OPR
STEP 8: ARSC - Assign RSC that allows Route Restriction Indexes (RRIs) for ISDN Bch
trunk route, the dummy route and the alternate trunk route.
STEP 2: Assign “ISDN Trunk” data referring to Chapter 3, Section 2, “ISDN Trunk Data Assignment” and
the data for the alternate trunk.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 31
Revision 1.0
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION-PRI
A-88 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) features to be activated for incoming calls from ISDN
trunks.
Table 5-1 ACD Features
CODE NO.
A-31
FEATURE NAME
AVAILABILITY
Abandoned Call Search
Assistance-ACD Agent
Automatic Answer
×
×
×
×
×
A-34
A-35
A-37
Availability-ACD Position
Announcements
A-80
B-21
Break Mode
Not Applicable
C-35
C-67
Call Distribution to Agents
Call Transfer to Split Queue
×
×
C-68
Call Waiting Indication-LCD Display/CW Lamp
Calling Party Identification
Call Control Vector
×
×
C-70
C-108
C-127
Not Applicable
Call Forwarding-Split
×
E-6
Emergency/Recorder
×
F-10
F-25
Function Groups (Splits)
Flexible ID Codes
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
H-20
L-19
Holidays Scheduling
Logon/Logoff
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
M-28
M-29
M-79
Monitoring-ACD Supervisor
×
Multiple Customer Groups (ACD Groups)
Multiple Supervisor Groups (Splits)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
N-12
N-14
Night Service-ACD
Non-ACD Call
×
Not Applicable
CHAPTER 5
Page 32
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION-PRI
Table 5-1 ACD Features
FEATURE NAME
CODE NO.
AVAILABILITY
O-19
Overflow Outside-ACD
×
P-21
P-40
P-45
Priority Queuing-ACD
Pilot Numbers
×
Not Applicable
Personal Emergency and Assist
×
Q-1
Queuing-ACD
×
×
R-19
Release-ACD Position
S-97
S-98
Split Display-ACD Position
Split Selection
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
T-24
T-49
T-50
Trunk Trouble Report-MIS
Tally Count
×
×
Time of Day/Week Routing
Not Applicable
Z-1
Zip Tone-ACD Position
×
Note 1: The features indicated “Not Applicable” are features not related to trunks.
Note 2: ACD features are not available for incoming data calls from ISDN trunk.
Note 3: When an incoming call placed in a queue, the call is automatically released in 90 seconds.
2. Operating Procedure
Refer to ACD System Manual.
3. Programming
STEP 2: Assign ACD Data (Refer to ACD System Manual.)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 33
Revision 1.0
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE-PRI
A-92
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a user from the ISDN trunk to hear a prearranged announcement when the user dials a
predetermined access code.
Note: This feature requires an announcement machine or a Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT).
2. Operating Procedure
1. The system receives the announcement trunk access code.
(a) If a multiple connection is made, the announcement is repeatedly sent out.
(b) If a single connection is made, the announcement is sent out only once and then the announcement
trunk is released. If the system data specifies “Ringback Tone is to be sent”, Ringback Tone is returned
to the caller after the announcement finishes.
2. The office data is checked for the following.
(a) Multiple or single connection.
(b) 30-second forced disconnection.
(c) Ringback Tone to be sent or not to be sent after the announcement finishes.
(d) Remote office answer signal sending to be sent or not to be sent.
3. The call is connected to the Announcement Trunk, and the caller hears the announcement.
4. If 30-sec. forced disconnection is specified, the Announcement Trunk is released 30 seconds after the call
has been connected to the Announcement Trunk, and the caller receives the Busy Tone. Otherwise, the call
remains connected to the Announcement Trunk until the caller hangs up.
3. Programming
STEP 2: Assign the announcement data (Refer to “[A-15] ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE” in Feature
Programming Manual.)
CHAPTER 5
Page 34
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT ASSURANCE-PRI
A-94
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT ASSURANCE-PRI
1. General Description
When a call connection time is less than or greater than a pre-determined time period, the system can display or
print a reference to it using this feature.
Note 1: This feature cannot be activated without Station Message Detail Recording System-RS232C[S-10].
Note 2: This feature is not activated for Station-to-Station or Station-to-Attendant calls under the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
When the station performs a switchhook flash.
term
When the station presses the D
line/feature key (“HOLD”, “SHF”, or “TRF”).
When the Attendant presses “HOLD” key.
When the call is overridden by another call.
When the station answers Call Waiting or Attendant Camp-On call.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 2: Assign SMDR data.
STEP 3: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 44 : bit 0=1 (Automatic Circuit Assurance is in service)
Index 45 : Short Duration Timer
Index 46 : Long Duration Timer
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 35
Revision 1.0
AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST-PRI
A-96
AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST-PRI
1. General Description
The AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST capability provides a functional test on a large number of ISDN trunks at a
prearranged time. The results of the test are reported at the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION
TERMINAL (MAT) [M-18]. The test can include: Ringback Tone Test, 1 kHz Tone Test and Trunk Selection
Test, by having the proper Test Trunk termination at the distant office.
2. Operating Procedure
Refer to “[A-21] AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST” in Feature Programming Manual.
3. Service Conditions
1. One LTST (PH-M23) card is required as additional hardware.
2. Trunks are tested in conjunction with the connecting office through the selected trunk, on a one at a time
basis. The following different trunk functions can be tested on all trunks in a specified group:
•
•
•
Trunk selection
Detection of RingbackTone sent back from the connecting office after test number outpulsing.
Detection of test tone (1 kHz) returned from Automatic Answer Trunk facility, if provided at the
connecting office.
3. As part of the AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST facility, an Automatic Answer Trunk (AAT) is provided at the
PBX to answer incoming test calls. Upon terminating the incoming test call from the originating office
through a selected test trunk, the AAT generates a 1 kHz tone to the originating office as an
acknowledgement signal.
4. When ordering the execution of this feature via theMAT, the system will prompt for either “Immediate or
Scheduled Execution” of the AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST. If Scheduled execution is chosen, the time
when the test begins is entered via the MAT. From the time the test is ordered until the completion of the
test, the MAT is dedicated to the AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST function.
5. INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS [I-4] must be available when activating this feature.
6. Trunk test data must be assigned by “ATTD” command.
7. This service is available to trunks that can receive PB signals.
4. Programming
Refer to “[A-21] AUTOMATIC TRUNK TEST” in Feature Programming Manual.
CHAPTER 5
Page 36
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
BOSS-SECRETARY TRANSFER-PRI
B-19
BOSS-SECRETARY TRANSFER-PRI
1. General Description
This service feature allows a secretary to voice-announce a call to a boss when the secretary answers a call from
an ISDN trunk on the boss’ line.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Call terminates to boss’ line.
term
2. Secretary answers the call on Boss’ line of Secretary’s D
.
3. Secretary presses boss’ line key; incoming call is placed on hold, a signal tone is transmitted over the
term
term
speaker of boss’ D
, and boss and secretary can talk by VOICE CALL-D
The LCD displays (Boss and Secretary):
ICM
XXXX
(Time Display)
term
term
4. If the “MIC” key of boss’ D
is on, Boss can converse HANDS FREE-D
[H-4D].
term
again, and boss’
term
line is placed on hold. At this time, boss’ line of Secretary’s D
is placed on hold, too, and secretary can
6. Boss lifts the handset, presses the boss’ line key, and answers the call. The LCD is displayed:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
XFR
XXXX TRANSFER
(Time Display)
XXXX
(Time Display)
Note 1: If the boss is talking on another line or has a single line telephone, boss’ station rings and VOICE
CALL [V-2D] cannot be activated.
Note 2: If the boss answers before the secretary hangs up, the boss will talk to the secretary. At this time, the
secretary can talk to the incoming call, to the boss by pressing the boss’ line key or the transfer key.
Note 3: If the boss doesn’t answer the held call in a specific time, secretary will be recalled by the held call.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASFC - Assign SFI 51=1 (Boss-Secretary is in service) to the secretary station.
STEP 2: AKYD - Boss’ My-line must be assigned as a sub-line on the secretary’s phone.
term
Note: Secretary must have D
for this operation. Boss may have a single line telephone.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 37
Revision 1.0
BOSS-SECRETARY OVERRIDE-PRI
B-22
BOSS-SECRETARY OVERRIDE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables a secretary to voice-announce a call from an ISDN trunk to a boss when he is currently on
his My-line.
2. Operating Procedure
Example: Station 200, Boss
Station 201, Secretary
Boss is currently connected to Trunk “A”. Call from an ISDN trunk (Trunk “B”) terminates to Station 201,
intended for 200.
1. Secretary answers station 201.
2. Secretary asks caller to hold and presses “CALL HOLD” [C-6] feature key or “TRANSFER” key and dials
CALL HOLD [C-6] code (CALL WAITING-ORIGINATING [C-31] key can also be used).
Secretary hears DialTone.
3. Secretary presses “SPEED CALLING-ONE TOUCH” [S-26D] key on which BOSS-SECRETARY
OVERRIDE tone code, RECALL key and Boss’ station number (200) has been programmed.
4. Secretary hears Ringback Tone; Boss receives three bursts ofWaiting Tone.
<BOSS’ RESPONSE OPTIONS>
Operations when the boss converses with Trunk “A” while talking with trunk “B”.
1. Boss presses the “TRANSFER” key. If Boss has a single line telephone, flashes hook switch.
2. Boss converses with Trunk “A” and Trunk “B” receives hold tone (MUSIC ON HOLD [M-7]).
3. Boss presses the “TRANSFER” key again. If a single line telephone, flashes hook switch again.
4. Boss converses with Trunk “B”. (THREE-WAY CALLING [T-2] is not available).
Other operations while Boss and Secretary are talking.
Case 1:
1. Boss or secretary presses the “TRANSFER” key.
2. The Boss and Secretary are disconnected; Boss converses with Trunk “A”, Secretary converses with Trunk
“B” respectively.
Case 2:
1. Boss hangs up and secretary converses with Trunk “B” again.
2. Boss’ station rings and Trunk “A” receives Ringback Tone.
3. Boss lifts the handset and converses with Trunk “A” again.
CHAPTER 5
Page 38
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
BOSS-SECRETARY OVERRIDE-PRI
Operations when the boss answers the secretary.
Case 1:
1. Boss presses the: “ANSWER” key or “TRANSFER” key. If Boss has a single line telephone, flashes hook
switch.
2. Boss converses with Secretary (Trunk “A” is placed on hold).
3. Secretary hangs up, Boss is speaking with Trunk “B”.
Case 2:
1. Boss presses the “ANSWER” key or “TRANSFER” key. If Boss has a single line telephone, flashes hook
switch.
2. Boss converses with Secretary (Trunk “A” is placed on hold).
3. Boss presses 201 key and converses with Trunk “A”, Secretary hears ReorderTone.
Case 3:
1. Boss hangs up, Boss’ station rings and Secretary hears Ringback Tone.
2. Boss lifts the handset and converses with Secretary.
3. The rest of operations are same as Item 3 of Case 1 or Case 2.
Case 4:
If Boss does not respond to 3 bursts of Waiting Tone:
Secretary presses “CALL HOLD” key to resume talking to Trunk “B”.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 10, bit4: 1 = Dialing “ACC Code + Station No.” is available.
(Call Waiting-Originating)
bit7: Call Waiting Tone 0/1=Once/At Intervals.
STEP 2: ANPD - Assign a number level for feature access code.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE, SRV=SSCA, SIDA=53
STEP 4: ASFC - Allows following restriction; SFI5, 6, 10, 11 and 51.
STEP 5: AKYD - Boss’ My-line must be assigned as a sub-line on the secretary’s phone.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 39
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
C-95
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits all calls from an ISDN network destined for a particular station to be routed to another
station (or to the Attendant) regardless of the busy or idle status of the called station. Activation and cancellation
may be accomplished by either the individual station user or the Attendant.
2. Operating Procedure
To activate CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI cancellation code; receive Service SetTone.
To activate CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT [T-12] number (2/3 digits).
4. Dial the originating station number.
5. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI cancellation code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT [T-12] number (2/3 digits).
4. Dial the originating station number; receive Service Set Tone.
CHAPTER 5
Page 40
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 4, bit 6: One burst of ringing at the forwarding station when CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS is in service? 0/1: No/
Yes. (single-line station only)
Index 248, bit 7:Dial Tone to be sent out when a station on which CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS is set, goes off-hook to
place and outgoing call 0/1: DialTone/Special DialTone.
Index 69, bit 1: A burst of Ringback Tone to alert the person receiving a
call that this is a CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
call. In service? 0/1: No/Yes. Normally assigned as data
“0”.
bit 2:
Send short tone when a recalled C.F.-All Calls call is
answered. 0/1: Not Required/Required.
System Data 2, Index 6, bit 4: Call Origination Restriction of a station upon setting
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS.
0/1=Restricted/Allowed.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Index, CI = N;
Normal. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS entry SID = 8. And to
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS cancel SID = 9. Assign Connection Status Index
(CI) for Normal service.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI = 7 to the Class of stations which will
activate CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS.
term
STEP 5: AKYD - For D
sets, CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS may be assigned to a programmable
line/feature key. Assign KYI = 1 and FKY = 2.
STEP 6: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Inter- and Intra-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI) = 1. For this feature to be set by the Attendant Console, assign
Inter- and Intra-Tenant Connection TRI = 3, via the Attendant Console. Also allow TRI =
0, station-to-station calling.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 41
Revision 1.0
term
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
term
C-95D CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
1. General Description
-PRI
This feature permits all calls from an ISDN network destined for a particular station to be routed to another
station or to the Attendant, regardless of the busy or idle status of the called station. Activation and cancellation
may be accomplished by the station user or the Attendant.
term
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI [C-95D] may be set or canceled by the station user for all
term
multi-line appearances on the D
. In this way, a single station user may set CALL FORWARDING-ALL
-PRI [C-95D] for all sub-lines on the D
term
term
CALLS-D
.
2. Operating Procedure
term
To set CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI from My-line:
1. Lift the handset or press the “SPEAKER” button; receive Dial Tone.
term
2. Press the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI feature key; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone. The LED will light. The LCD displays:
TA RGET
STATION
TARGET
STATION
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX
OR
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
OPR
FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
OPR
OPERATOR
4. Replace the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key.
term
To monitor CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
1. Press the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI from My-line:
term
-PRI feature key. The LCD displays:
TA RGET
STATION
TARGET
STATION
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD
XXXX FORWARD
(Time Display)
XXXX
(Time Display)
OR
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
OPR
FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
OPR
OPERATOR
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 42
Revision 1.0
term
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
term
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI from My-line:
1. Lift the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key; receive Dial Tone.
term
2. Press the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI feature key; receive Service SetTone.
The LED of the associated feature key will go out. The LCD displays:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD CNCL
(Time Display)
FORWARD CANCEL
(Time Display)
3. Replace the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key.
term
To set CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI for multi-line appearance other than the My-line:
1. Lift the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key.
2. Press the multi-line appearance; receive Dial Tone. Then press CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
PRI feature key; receive Special Dial Tone.
term
-
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone. The LED of the associated feature key does
term
not light at the station setting the service. If the multi-line appearance is another D ’s My-line, that
station’s feature key LED will light. The setting station’s LCD displays:
TARGET
STATION
TARGET
STATION
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX
OPR
4. Replace the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key.
5. If the target station is the Attendant, the LCD displays:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
OPR
FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
term
To monitor CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI for a multi-line appearance other than the My-
line:
term
1. Press the multi-line appearance. Then press the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
key. The LCD displays:
-PRI feature
TARGET
STATION
TARGET
STATION
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX FORWARD SET
(Time Display)
XXXX
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 43
Revision 1.0
term
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
term
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-D -PRI for a multi-line appearance other than the My-line:
1. Lift the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key; receive Dial Tone.
2. Press the multi-line appearance; receive Dial Tone. Then press the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-
term
D
-PRI feature key; receive Service SetTone. The LCD displays:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
FWD CNCL
(Time Display)
FORWARD CANCEL
(Time Display)
The associated LED that is lit at another station goes out.
3. Replace the handset or press the “SPEAKER” key.
3. Programming
Refer to [C-5] CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS”.
CHAPTER 5
Page 44
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI
C-96
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a call to a busy station to be immediately forwarded to a predesignated station or to the
ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
If a called station is in a hunt group and forwards calls to another hunt group, it can be determined by system
data, whether the calling party is directed to the called parties hunt group or the terminating parties hunt group
when all of the forwarded stations are busy.
2. Operating Procedure
To set CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset, receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI cancel code; receive Service SetTone.
To set CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT SERVICE [T-12] number (2 digits).
4. Dial the originating station number.
5. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI cancel code.
3. Dial the TENANT SERVICE [T-12] number (2 digits).
4. Dial the originating station number; receive Service Set Tone.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 5, bit 0: Access codes for CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE
and CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER are same
or separate? 0/1: Same/Separate.
bit 5: Hunting Group when transferred party is busy (Station
Hunting after C.F.-Busy Line) 0/1: Hunt in Transferring
Party’s Group/Hunt in Transferred Party’s Group
bit 7: Multiple Call Forwarding Service 0/1: Out/In Service
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Index, CI=N;
Normal. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 45
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE-PRI
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE Entry, SID=10 and to
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE Cancel, SID=11. Assign Connection Status Index
(CI) for Normal service.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign the stations to receive CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE a Service Feature
Class that allows SFI=9.
term
STEP 5: AKYD - For D
sets, CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE may be assigned to a programmable
line/feature key. Assign KYI=1 and FKY=1.
STEP 6: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Inter- and Intra-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI)=1. For this feature to be set by the Attendant Console assignment,
assign TRI=3 for Inter- and Intra-tenant connection via the Attendant Console. This allows
a station in one tenant to be Call Forwarded to a station in the same or different tenant. Also
assign TRI=0, station-to-station calling.
STEP 7: ACFO - For tenant-wide CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE of an incoming DID and DIT calls,
Note
Assign CF=1 for a destination (CFI) of either the Attendant Console or a station.
Note: Step 7 is necessary for CALL FORWARDING on a system basis only.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 46
Revision 1.0
CALL PICKUP-GROUP-PRI
C-97
CALL PICKUP-GROUP-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a station user to answer ISDN Network calls directed to other lines in a preset CALL
PICKUP-GROUP simply by dialing a pickup code.
2. Operating Procedure
Picking up an incoming ISDN call:
1. A call from the ISDN network terminates to a trunk.
2. Stations within the same CALL PICKUP-GROUP-PRI ring.
3. Lifts the handset; receives Dial Tone.
4. Dials the call pickup code; the call is connected to the station.
Picking up an incoming call (Consultation Hold):
1. A call from the ISDN network terminates to a trunk.
2. The station within the same CALL PICKUP-GROUP-PRI ring.
3. The station flashes the switchhook; receives special DialTone.
4. Dials the call pickup code; the call is connected to the station.
5. The first party is put on CALL HOLD [C-6] status.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Index, CI=N, H;
Normal, Hooking. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign an access code for the CALL PICKUP GROUP, SID = 7 for Connection Status
Index (CI) of Normal and Hooking.
STEP 3: ACPG - Assign members of CALL PICKUP GROUP. If two stations are ringing simultaneously,
the station that was programmed first will be picked up first.
Note: Maximum 100 stations per group.
•
•
No limit to the number of Groups per system.
Stations must belong to the same tenant.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 47
Revision 1.0
term
CALL PICKUP-GROUP-D
-PRI
term
C-97D CALL PICKUP-GROUP-D
1. General Description
-PRI
This feature permits a station user to answer an ISDN network call directed to another line in a preset CALL
PICKUP-GROUP by using a programmable line/feature key.
term
CALL PICKUP-GROUP-D -PRI may be used by seizing Dial Tone from any multi-line appearance on the
term
D
.
2. Operating Procedure
Picking up an incoming call:
1. An incoming call from the ISDN network terminates to a trunk.
2. The stations within the same call pickup group ring.
3. Lifts the handset; receives Dial Tone.
4. Press the call pickup group feature key; the call is connected to the station. The LCD displays:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
CALLED
CALLED
STATION
CALLING
STATION/TRUNK
CALLING
STATION/TRUNK
STATION
PCK
XXXX
PICK UP
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
(Time Display)
(Time Display)
Picking up an incoming call (consultation Hold):
1. An incoming call from the ISDN network terminates to a trunk.
2. The stations within the same call pickup group ring.
3. Press the “TRANSFER”/“CALL HOLD” feature key; receives Special Dial Tone.
4. Press the call pickup group feature key; the call is connected to the station.
5. The first party is put on CALL HOLD [C-6] status.
3. Programming
STEP 4: AKYD - Optional. Assign a programmable Line/Feature key as a CALL PICKUP key. Assign KYI
= 1 and FKY = 12.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 48
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT-PRI
C-98
CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a station user, while connected to an ISDN network call, to signal the Attendant and have
the Attendant transfer the call to another station within the system.
2. Operating Procedure
Calling the Attendant:
1. While engaged in a PRI trunk call, press the switchhook; receive Special Dial Tone.
2. Dial the operator/access code.
3. a. ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] “RCL” lamp flashes and buzzer sounds.
b. The station receives Ringback Tone.
Answering by the Attendant:
1. Refer to “ATTENDANT CONSOLE USER’S GUIDE”.
If the station wishes to return to the Central Office trunk call while the Attendant is being called:
1. Press the switchhook; the “RCL” lamp goes out; the buzzer stops.
2. Ringback Tone stops; the station returns to PRI trunk call.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 0 and 1: Assign a data to allow CONSULTATION HOLD. All
types of connections.
STEP 2: ATNR - Allow tenant restriction. Assign Tenant Restriction Index (TRI) 0, and 4 on an intra-and
Inter-tenant basis.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 49
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-PRI
C-99
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing ISDN calls to another station within the
system without Attendant assistance.
2. Operating Procedure
To transfer a call in progress:
1. While connected with the first party; press the switchhook; receive Special Dial Tone.
2. Dial the third party; receive Ringback Tone.
3. At this point, the station user can either:
(a) Hang up before the third party answers. The first and third parties will be connected when third party
answers.
(a) Wait for third party answer and announce the transfer while keeping the first party in a CONSULTA-
TION HOLD-ALL CALLS-PRI [C-100] condition. When the station user hangs up, the first and third
parties will be automatically connected.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 69, bit 0: Return transferred call to transferring party after the
elapse of the Recall Timer. Only applicable to blind
transfers.
bit 2: Short tone on recall of CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS.
Ringback Tone is briefly heard by the person answering
the recall.
Index 140:
(if ASFC SFI 103 = 0)/Index 247 (if ASFC SFI 103 = 1).
Assign the Recall Timer for a station-to-station CALL
TRANSFER-ALL CALLS. For 30 seconds, assign data
00H. (TC3 = 2 sec, TC7 = 8 sec.) RAM data 3FH for 30
seconds.
System Data 2, Index 1, bits 0 & 1:Assign a data to allow CONSULTATION HOLD [C-17,
C-17D].
STEP 2: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Intra- and Inter-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI) 0 and 4 on an Intra- and Inter-tenant basis.
STEP 3: ARSC - The station receiving the call must be assigned a Route Restriction Class (RSC) that will
allow the station to be connected to the trunk if a trunk is involved.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 50
Revision 1.0
term
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
term
C-99D CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-D
1. General Description
-PRI
This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing ISDN calls without Attendant assistance.
2. Operating Procedure
To transfer a call in progress:
1. While connected with the first party, press the “TRANSFER” key; receive Special Dial Tone.
2. Dial the third party; receive Ringback Tone.
3. At this point, the station user can either wait and announce the call or hang up before the transfer is
completed. The LCD display for an announced transfer will be:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
TRANSFERRED
PA RTY
TRANSFERRED
PARTY
XFR
XXXX
TRANSFER
(Time Display)
XXXX
(Time Display)
The LCD display for an unannounced transfer will be:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
TRANSFERRING
TRANSFERRING
PARTY
TRANSFERRED
PARTY
TRANSFERRED
PARTY
PARTY
XFR
XXXX
TRANSFER
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
(Time Display)
(Time Display)
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 51
Revision 1.0
CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS-PRI
C-100 CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a station user to hold any incoming or outgoing ISDN network call or any intraoffice call
while originating a call to another station within the system.
2. Operating Procedure
To hold the original call and place the second call:
1. Press the switchhook; receive Special Dial Tone.
2. The original call is held.
3. Dial the second station number; receive Ringback Tone.
4. The second station answers; the consultation hold state has been entered.
To return to the original call:
1. In any of the following cases, the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the switchhook:
(a) The Second station called for consultation is busy.
(b) The Calling station cannot access to second station due to restriction or any other reason.
(c) Second station does not answer.
2. If the second party hangs up, the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call.
If the originating station flashes the switchhook, THREE-WAY CALLING [T-2] will be initiated.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1,bits 0 & 1:CONSULTATION HOLD allowed or denied? 00:
Denied; 01: Originating and Terminating Calls allowed,
Tandem Call Denied; 11: All calls allowed. Normally
assign data “11”.
System Data 3, Index 2, bits 0-3: Switchhook flash starts timer. To calculate this value:
(1-FH) × 120 msec = Timer.
bits 4-7: Switchhook flash ends timer. To calculate this value: (1-
FH) × 120 msec = Timer. For both beginning and
ending timers, assign 91H for 120-1080 msec.
f (t)
bit 0-3
120ms
bit 4-7
SHF detect
0ms
1080ms Disconnection
No detection
CHAPTER 5
Page 52
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
term
CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
term
C-100D CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS-D
-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature permits a D
station user to hold any incoming or outgoing ISDN network calls while originating
a call to another station within the system.
2. Operating Procedure
term
To hold the original call and place second call from a D
:
1. Press the “TRANSFER” key; receive Special Dial Tone.
2. The original call is held.
3. Dial the second station number; receive Ringback Tone.
4. The Second station answers; the consultation hold state has been entered.
term
To return to the original call from a D
:
1. In any of the following cases, the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the “TRANSFER”
key:
(a) Second station called for consultation is busy.
(b) Calling station cannot access to the second station due to a restriction or some other reason.
2. If the second station hangs up, the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call.
term
3. If the second station stays on, pressing the “TRANSFER” key returns the original call to the D
second call is being held.
while the
Press the “CONF” key to initiate THREE-WAY CALLING [T-2].
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 53
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT/ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
C-101 CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT/ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides for the interception of a called party number received via ISDN by DIRECT INWARD
DIALING [D-8] calls which cannot be completed (unassigned station, level, etc.). These calls are automatically
routed to a recorded announcement, informing the caller that an inoperative number was reached and giving the
listed directory number for information.
This feature permits a station originated call, upon encountering a restricted outgoing number, to automatically
be routed to a recorded announcement informing the caller that the dialed number is restricted for this station.
This feature permits a station originated call, upon encountering a trunk busy condition, to automatically be
routed to a recorded announcement informing the caller that all the outgoing trunks are busy.
Note: This feature requires an announcement trunk and an announcement machine or a Digital Announcement
Trunk (DAT).
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ACFO - Enable this feature by allowing CF = 3: CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT/
ANNOUNCEMENT. The CFI parameter will come up for assignment. An Attendant
Console may be programmed so that intercepted calls can terminate at the CALL
FORWARD INTERCEPT key. If no assignment is made, the PBX program goes to the
AAED command for announcement trunk information because the destination of the
transfer is a trunk and not a station or Attendant Console.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the announcement route (in the case of DAT) as shown below:
RT: 1
1-OSGS : 2 2-ONSG : 2
*If a PA-8TL
6-TCL
: 4
7-L/T
: 1
15-LSG : 0*
The other data than above must be set “0” (default data).
STEP 3: ATRK - Assign the LENs, Announcement Trunk Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant
Number.
STEP 4: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the Announcement Trunk.
STEP 5: ARRC - If TIE Line or REMOTE ACCESS TO PBX [R-2] connection to the ANNOUNCEMENT
SERVICE Trunk is required, allow trunk-to-trunk connection using ARI: D, Direct
Connection.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 54
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT/ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
STEP 6: AAED - Used to assign Announcement equipment. Assign:
TN:
EQP:
0:
Tenant Number;
Announcement Equipment Number
Dead Level
1:
Unused Number (LCR OPR not programmed)
2:
Available
3:
Available
4:
5:
Outgoing Trunk Group Busy Announcement
Available
6:
Available
7:
8-15:
Outgoing Route Restriction Announcement
Available for ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE [A-15] applications.
RT, TK: Route & Trunk number of the trunk connected to the Announcement Equipment;
C:
Duration of Connection, 0/1: Disconnection occurs in 30 seconds/the connection
is held until the station releases. See the requirements of the announcement
equipment.
R:
A:
Sending RBT, 0/1: Sending RBT/Not sending RBT. Normally assign data “0”.
Answer Signal Sending, 0/1: No answer from Incoming trunk/Answer from
Incoming trunk. Normally assign data “0”. No answer signal is sent to the CO.
Therefore calling party will not be billed for the call.
M:
Multiple Connection 0/1: Single Connection/Multiple Connection. See the
requirements of the announcement equipment.
STEP 7: ACFR - Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction. Upon determining which types of Call Class
Indexes (CCI) will be answered via CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT; for example,
DID call; allow that CCI a Transfer Service Feature Index of 1, for CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS, DON’T ANSWER, BUSY.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 55
Revision 1.0
CALL PICKUP-DIRECT-PRI
C-102 CALL PICKUP-DIRECT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to pick up an ISDN call to any other station in the system by dialing a specific
call pickup code.
2. Operating Procedure
To pick-up an incoming call:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the CALL PICK UP-DIRECT-PRI code; receive Second Dial Tone.
3. Dial the specific station number to be picked up; the incoming call is connected to your station.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bits 0 & 1:CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS [C-17]
allowed or denied. 00: Denied; 01: Originating and
Terminating Calls allowed, Tandem Call Denied;
11: All calls allowed.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign for normal.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to CALL PICKUP-DIRECT, SRV = SSC, SID = 35 for Connection
Status Index (CI) of Normal.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 29 to the stations.
CHAPTER 5
Page 56
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL WAITING-TERMINATING-PRI
C-114 CALL WAITING-TERMINATING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables a busy station to receive a second incoming call from DID trunk of ISDN network. A Call
Waiting Tone is sent to the busy station, the user can use CALL HOLD [C-3] to answer the second call. CALL
HOLD [C-3] may be used to alternate between the two calls.
2. Operating Procedure
To activate CALL WAITING-TERMINATING on an incoming ISDN trunk call:
1. The system receives the called station number.
2. If the called station is busy, CALL WAITING-TERMINATING is automatically set;
calling station receives Call Waiting Ringback Tone.
Call Waiting Tone (2 beeps) is sent to the busy station. If the called station is a D
key flashes.
term
LED of “ANSWER”
To answer a CALL WAITING-TERMINATING call:
1. Call Waiting Tone is heard during the call in progress.
term
2. Flashing the switchhook or pressing the“ANSWER” key on the D
3. CALL WAITING-TERMINATING is automatically connected.
4. Another switchhook flash or pressing the“ANSWER” key on the D
hold the second call.
will hold the existing call.
term
will return to the original call and
OR
1. Call Waiting Tone is heard during call in progress.
2. The called station hangs up; priority ringing is sent.
Priority ringing = 0.4 sec. ON
0.2 sec. OFF 0.4 sec. ON
3. Lift the handset to answer.
0.2 sec. OFF 0.8 sec. ON
0.4 sec. OFF
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 2 Index 10, bit 6: Call Waiting-Terminating Service 0/1=Out/In Service.
STEP 3: ASFC - Assign SFI6=1 (Call Waiting-Terminating Service is allowed.). Also SFI11=1 (Data Line
Security is OFF.).
STEP 4: ARTD - For DID Trunk (Bch) of ISDN, assign CDN46 (CW)=1.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 57
Revision 1.0
CALL PARK-PRI
C-119 CALL PARK-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables the Attendant(s) or station users to “Park” calls from the ISDN network against their own
station numbers. Calls can easily be retrieved from any station within the system.
2. Operating Procedure
When an ISDN trunk party and ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] are talking:
1. The Attendant presses the “CALL PARK” key; the CALL PARK number is automatically selected and
displayed at theATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
2. The Attendant receives Service Set Tone.
3. The Attendant presses either the “RELEASE” or “CANCEL” key.
Note: If no CALL PARK numbers are available, Attendant receives Busy Tone and no number is displayed.
When an ISDN trunk party and a station user are talking:
1. The station user momentarily presses the switchhook; receives Special DialTone.
2. Dial the CALL PARK access code, the ISDN trunk connects to the called station is placed into call park
state; receives Service Set Tone.
3. Replace the handset.
To retrieve a Parked Call from the Setting Station:
1. Dial the CALLPARK local retrieval code; the parked call is reconnected.
To retrieve a Parked Call from a Different Station:
1. Dial the CALL PARK remote retrieval code and the number of the station which has parked the call; the
parked call is reconnected.
To retrieve a Parked Call set by ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] from the station user.
1. Dial the CALLPARK remote retrieval code and call park number; the parked call is reconnected.
CHAPTER 5
Page 58
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL PARK-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 142:
For CALL PARK recall, the Miscellaneous Timer
Counter is assigned in bits 0-3. The Timer Class is
assigned in bits 4-6. Timer Class of 3 = 2 seconds.
Timer Counter of 4 = 30 seconds. (Default: 450
seconds.)
b7
b4
b3
b0
TC
MTC
Misc. Timer
Counter
Timer Class
TC = 3 : 2 Sec. Increments
TC = 4 : 30 Sec. Increments
System Data 2, Index 1, bits 0&1: CONSULTATION HOLD-ALL CALLS [C-17]
allowed or denied.
00: Denied: 01:Originating and Terminating Calls
allowed, 10:Tandem Call Denied 11:All calls allowed.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and retrieval. Assign for normal and hooking.
Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to:
(a) CALL PARK access code, SRV = SSC, SID = 61, Connection Index of Hooking.
(b) CALL PARK local retrieval code, SRV = SSC, SID = 62, Connection Index of
Normal.
(c) CALL PARK remote retrieval code, SRV = SCC, SID = 63, NND = number of digits
in the access code, and assign a Connection Index of Normal.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 67 to the applicable stations. This allows the
station to park a call and to retrieve a parked call. Assign stations a Service Feature Class
the allows SFI 68, CALL PARK called. This allows a station to be parked by another
station or Attendant Console.
STEP 5: ASAT - This command must be assigned to designate a specific station number to the Attendant
Console. This number is used to identify the Attendant Console when parking a call.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 59
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
C-123 CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits all calls from ISDN trunks destined for a particular station to be routed to a recorded
announcement. Activation and cancellation may be accomplished either by the individual station user or the
ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
Note: This service feature requires “Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT)”
2. Operating Procedure
To activate CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset: receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT access code (same as CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5]): receive Special Dial Tone.
3. Dial the desired announcement trunk access code (same as ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE [A-15]): receive
Service Set Tone.
(If activation is not possible, receive the Busy Tone.)
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT from an Individual Station:
1. Lift the handset: receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT cancel code (same as CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5]): receive Service Set Tone.
3. Programming
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 4, bit 6: One burst of ringing at forwarding station when CALL
FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] is in service? 0/1:
No/Yes. (for a single line station only)
Index 69, bit 1: A burst of Ringback Tone to alert the person receiving a
call that this is a CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
[C-5] call. In service? 0/1: No/Yes. Normally assigned as
data “0”.
System Data 2, Index 6, bit 4: Enable station set for CALL FORWARDING-ALL
CALLS [C-5] to be allowed to use their phones normally.
If data “0” is assigned, the station will only be able to call
the Attendant Console. Assign on a permanent basis.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for service feature access and cancel. Assign for normal. Assign
NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] entry SID = 8, and
to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] cancel SID = 9. Assign Connection Status
Index (CI) for normal service.
CHAPTER 5
Page 60
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign the stations to activate CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] a Service
Feature Class that allows SFI = 7.
term
STEP 5: AKYD - For D
sets, CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] may be assigned to a
programmable line/feature key. Assign KYI = 1 and FKY = 2.
STEP 6: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Inter-and Intra-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI) = 1. For this service feature to be set by the Attendant Console,
assign Inter- and Intra-Tenant connection via the Attendant Console TRI = 3. Also allow
TRI = 0, station-to-station calling.
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for Trunk Access. Assign for Connection Indexes for Normal.
Assign NND values in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign an access code to the announcement trunk. Assign SRV = ANNC and the EQP
number assignment should be as assigned with the AAED command.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the announcement route (in the case of DAT) as shown below.
RT: 1
1-OSGS : 2
2-ONSG : 2
6-TCL : 4
7-L/T
: 1
The other data must be set “0” (default data).
STEP 4: ATRK - Assign the LENs, Announcement Trunk Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant
Number. Assign one or more trunks to a specific route used as an announcement trunk.
STEP 5: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the announcement trunk.
STEP 6: ARRC - Allow trunk-to-trunk connection (Bch route (ISDN) to Announcement Trunk route) using
ARI: D, Direct Connection.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 61
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ANNOUNCEMENT-PRI
STEP 7: AAED - Assign announcement equipment.
TN:
Tenant Number
EQP:
Announcement Equipment Number
0: Dead Level
1: Unused Number (LCR OPR not programmed)
2: Available
3: Available
4: Outgoing Trunk Group Busy Announcement
5: Available
6: Available
7: Outgoing Route Restriction Announcement
8-15: Available for ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE [A-15] applications.
RT, TK: Route and trunk number of the trunk connected to the announcement
equipment;
C:
Duration of Connection, 0/1: Disconnection occurs in 30 seconds/the
connection is held until the station releases. See the requirements of the
announcement equipment.
R:
A:
Sending RBT, 0/1: Sending RBT/Not sending RBT. Normally assign data “0”.
Answer Signal Sending, 0/1: No answer from Incoming trunk/Answer from
Incoming trunk. Normally assign data “0”. No answer signal is sent to the C.O.
Therefore, calling party will not be billed for the call.
M:
Multiple Connection 0/1: Single Connection/Multiple Connection. See the
requirements of the announcement equipment.
CHAPTER 5
Page 62
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT-PRI
C-125 CALL FORWARDING-INTERCEPT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides for interception of incoming calls from ISDN trunk which cannot be completed
(unassigned station, level, etc.). These calls are automatically routed to a predetermined station or Attendant.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 63
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER-PRI
C-129 CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a call from an ISDN network to an unanswered station to be forwarded to a predesignated
station or to the Attendant when the called station doesn’t answer after a predetermined time interval.
2. Operating Procedure
To set CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI from an individual station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI from an individual station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI cancel code; receive Service SetTone.
To set CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT SERVICE [T-12] number (2 Digits).
4. Dial the originating station number.
5. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-DON'T ANSWER-PRI cancel code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT SERVICE [T-12] number (2 Digit).
4. Dial the originating station number; receive Service Set Tone.
CHAPTER 5
Page 64
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 5, bit 0: Are the access codes for CALL FORWARDING-BUSY
LINE [C-2] and CALL FORWARDING-DON’T
ANSWER the same or separate? 0/1: Same/Separate.
Index 69, bit 1: Send short tone when a call forwarded via C.F.-ALL
Calls service is answered. 0/1: Not Required/Required
bit 2: Send short tone when a recalled C.F.- All Calls call is
answered. 0/1: Not Required/Required
Index 139:
Assign the No Answer timer for station-to-station, DID
and TIE Line calls. Default data is 30sec.
Index 141:
Assign the No Answer timer for incoming calls via the
Attendant Console. It will then be forwarded to the next
station according to SYS1, Index 145 timer. Default data
is 10sec.
Index 145:
Assign the time an incoming call via the Attendant
Console will ring at the CALL FORWARD-DON’T
ANSWER station before recalling to the Attendant
Console. Default data is 32sec.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Index, CI = N;
Normal. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER entry, SID = 12, and
to CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER cancel, SID = 13. Assign Connection Status
Index (CI) for Normal service.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign the stations to receive CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER a Service
Feature Class that allows SFI = 8.
term
STEP 5: AKYD - For D
sets, CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER may be assigned to a
programmable line/feature key. Assign KYI = 2 and FKY = 22.
STEP 6: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Inter- and Intra-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI) = 1. For this service feature to be set by the Attendant Console,
assign Inter- and Intra-Tenant connection via the Attendant Console, TRI = 3. Also assign
TRI = 0, station-to-station calling.
STEP 7: ACFO - For tenant-wide CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER assign CF = 2 for a destination
Note
(CFI) of either the Attendant Console or a station.
STEP 8: ACFS - CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER can also be assigned via the ACFS command.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 65
Revision 1.0
DISTINCTIVE RINGING-PRI
D-115 DISTINCTIVE RINGING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides distinctive station ringing patterns so that the station user can distinguish between internal
and external incoming calls.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 72, bit 6: Is DISTINCTIVE RINGING applied to calls handled via
the Attendant Console? 0/1: No/Yes. Otherwise these
calls will ring as station-to-station calls.
RINGER PATTERN 0
Normally used for C.O. Calls.
System Data 3, Index 0. Assign data 21H for C.O. calls to ring 1 second ON, 2 seconds OFF. Assign
42H for 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, on a per-route basis. Go to ARTD CDN 12.
System Data 3, Index 3, bit 0. Should Ringer Pattern 0 be assigned interrupted ringing capability? 0/
1: No/Yes.
RINGER PATTERN 1
Normally used for Station-to-Station Calls.
System Data 3, Index 1. Assign data 42H for station-to-station calls to ring for 2 seconds ON and 4
seconds OFF.
System Data 3, Index 3, bit 1. Should ringer pattern 1 be assigned interrupted ringer pattern 1 ringing
capability? 0/1: No/Yes.
RINGER PATTERN 5
System Data 3, Index 3, bit 5. Enable ringer pattern 5? 0/1: No/Yes. This ringer pattern is applicable
to CALL BACK [C-1], OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING [O-2], and CALL WAITING-
ORIGINATING [C-31].
System Data 3, Index 7. Assign data 24H for 4 seconds ON, 2 seconds OFF. (Ringer pattern 5.)
STEP 3: ARTD - To provide a distinctive ring to specific routes, assign data “1” to CDN 12, Distinctive Ring
(DR).
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI48, Burst Ringing, to PA-16LC port stations
that will not operate using DISTINCTIVE RINGING. With this feature, the system does
not look at ASYD, System Data 3, Index 3 bits 0 and 1 to determine how this telephone will
ring. Telex, FAX machines, and OPX stations may require a longer ringing signal. Digital
term
D
s will not respond to this feature.
CHAPTER 5
Page 66
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
term
DO NOT DISTURB-D
-PRI
term
D-116D DO NOT DISTURB-D
-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to set Do Not Disturb status. Incoming ISDN calls will be denied access to the
My-line while DND status is in effect.
2. Operating Procedure
To set Do Not Disturb:
Press the Do Not Disturb (“DND”) Key. The associated LED will light. The LCD displays:
DND SET
XXXXXXXX
(Time Display)
To cancel Do Not Disturb:
Press the Do Not Disturb (“DND”) Key. The LED will go out. The LCD displays:
[Dterm Series III]
[Dterm Series E]
DND CNCL
XXXXXXXX
DND CANCEL
XXXXXXXX
(Time Display)
(Time Display)
3. Programming
term
STEP 1: AKYD - Assign the following key data for the D
TN:
STN: Station Number
.
1
term
TP:
Type of D
(0~3)
KYN: Key Number (1-40)
KYI: Service Index
0: Key Not Used
1: Feature Key
2: Multi-line key
KD: Not assigned for Feature Key
FKY: Function Key Number
FKY=50, DO NOT DISTURB.
term
STEP 2: ASFC - Select an indication type (RST/DND) on the display of a D
when it terminates to a
station which has been set DO NOT DISTURB.
term
SFI= 114 Calling Party DND Indication (D
0/1: RST/DND
)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 67
Revision 1.0
DATA LINE SECURITY-PRI
D-117 DATA LINE SECURITY-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows those line circuits used for ISDN DATA transmission to be protected from interruptions such
as ATTENDANT CAMP-ON [A-1], BUSY VERIFICATION [B-3], EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY [E-1],
and ATTENDANT OVERRIDE [A-7].
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASFC - Set the Data Line Security to a data terminal.
SFI 11=0
CHAPTER 5
Page 68
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI
D-118 DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to prevent interruptions to ISDN data calls by ATTENDANT CAMP-ON [A-
1], BUSY VERIFICATION [B-3], CALL WAITING-TERMINATING [C-12], or ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
[A-7] by dialing a DATA PRIVACY feature code. This feature is set automatically when a data connection is
established.
2. Operating Procedure
To activate DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI from a single line:
1. Lift handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial desired number.
3. Before beginning data communications, flash switchhook; receive Special Dial Tone.
4. Dial DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI access code; receive Service Set Tone.
5. Flash switchhook to return to original connection, or wait 30 seconds to return automatically.
6. To cancel Data Privacy, flash switchhook; receive Special Dial Tone.
7. Dial DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI cancel code; receive Service Set Tone.
8. To return to original connection, flash switchhook momentarily, or wait 30 seconds to return automatically.
term
To activate DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI from a D
.
1. Lift handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial desired number.
3. Before beginning data communications, press the “DND” key.
4. The display shows “PRV SET” for 3 seconds and returns to original connection. The “DND” lamp flashes
as long as DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-PRI is set.
5. If the DND key is pressed again, “PRV CNCL” is displayed for three seconds and DATA PRIVACY ON
DEMAND-PRI will be canceled.
term
Data connection (D
/Data Adapter).
1. No manual operation is required. When a Data Call (Data Adapter) is originated, DATA PRIVACY ON
DEMAND-PRI is set automatically. When the data call is disconnected, DATA PRIVACY ON DEMAND-
PRI is canceled automatically.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for access code.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign CI=H SRV=SSCA SIDA=48 (Data Privacy on Demand; Entry)
Assign CI=H SRV=SSCA SIDA=49 (Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel)
STEP 3: AKYD - Assign FKI=1, FKY=50 (Do Not Disturb)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 69
Revision 1.0
DATA INTERFACE-AUTOMATIC ANSWER-PRI
D-119 DATA INTERFACE-AUTOMATIC ANSWER-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature enables incoming ISDN Data Calls to be answered automatically by a D /Data Adapter.
2. Operating Procedure
To set DATA INTERFACE AUTOMATIC ANSWER-PRI, select the Attribute Data Entry or change the switch
setting for Auto Answer. Refer to ATTRIBUTE DATA ENTRY [A-39] for details.
term
The D
/Data Adapter may be set in two ways:
term
Setting the D
Data Adapter for Auto Answer by changing the Terminal Attribute Data II
1. Press the “DATA” key; The DATA lamp lights steadily and the display shows 'D'.
2. Press the “DTX” key (or “ANSWER” key). The “DTX” lamp (or ANSWER lamp) lights steadily.
3. The display shows 'DATA SET'.
4. Key in '00'; the display shows 'ER CHECK XX YY'; press the “#” key.
5. The display shows 'AUTO ANS 01 YY'.
6. Key in '01'; the display shows 'AUTO ANS 01 01'.
7. Press the “#” key, and Service Set Tone (2 beeps) is heard; press the “DATA” key.
8. Auto Answer Setup is complete.
term
Setting the D
Data Adapter for Auto Answer by pressing the “DSPY/AUTO” key:
1. Press the “DSPY/AUTO” key. The “DSPY/AUTO” lamp lights steadily.
2. Auto Answer Setup is complete.
Note: ER=DTR
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARSC - Allow the restriction for an incoming call from ISDN trunk (Bch).
STEP 2: ASDT - Assign an Data Terminal (DTE).
TEC=13 (Data Terminal via Data Adaptor)
TEC=16 (Data Terminal via Data Module)
term
STEP 3: AKYD - Assign the Data key on D
FKI=1, FKY=29 (DATA)
.
FKI=1, FKY=30 (DSPY/AUTO)
FKI=1, FKY=31 (DTX)
CHAPTER 5
Page 70
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
DATA TRANSPARENCY-PRI
D-120 DATA TRANSPARENCY-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides a completely transparent switched data path between two connected Data Terminals via
PRI.
2. Operating Procedure
Establish a data call using the procedures described in the ASYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING [A-24] and
SYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING [S-29] feature descriptions.
When the data connection has been established, information transfer between the two connected DTEs is
completely transparent at speeds up to 9.6 kbps asynchronous and 56 kbps synchronous. The system does not
alter the data in any manner.
3. Programming
No programming is required.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 71
Revision 1.0
DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI
D-121 DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables data communication between two systems, through PRI over ISDN (Digital Line Link). The
ISDN link can be accessed through various connections.
Note: Unrestricted Data:
• The following communication speeds are supported:
Asynchronous Synchronous
50-9600 bps
2. Operating Procedure
1. Modem-to-Modem.
2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, and 48K bps
Sync. or Async.
Modem
Sync. or Async.
Modem
ISDN
16LC
PRI
PRI
16LC
DTE
DTE
Analog
Station
Analog
Station
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-1 Typical Modem-to-Modem Connection
(a) An analog telephone user with a modem dials a remote extension which also has a modem.
(b) The remote modem rings and is manually or automatically answered.
(c) The remote modem returns answer tone (modem tone).
(d) Both modems exchange carrier signals.
(e) A data communications path is established.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 72
Revision 1.0
DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI
PRI
PRI
ISDN
DM or DA
DM or DA
DTE
DTE
(Async. Only)
(Async. Only)
Modem
Pool
Modem
Pool
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-2 Modem Pool to Modem Pool
•
Asynchronous Data Terminal connected to a Data Module;
1. Enter “DM CALL <ENTER>” on the DTE keyboard; “READY” is returned.
2. Enter the number of the remote DTE: “DIAL XXXXX <ENTER>”.
3. “CALLING” is returned and the local modem pool is transferred to ISDN.
4. “WAITING” will be displayed until the call is answered.
5. The remote Data Module or Data Adapter manually or automatically answers the data call and the
remote modem pool is connected between the called station and the ISDN network.
6. “OPEN” is returned to the calling Data Module.
7. The remote modem pool sends answer tone.
8. Both modems exchange carrier signals.
9. Data transmission can begin.
10. To terminate the data call, enter “<ESC>-DM <ENTER>”.
11. “ACK” is returned; enter “RLS <ENTER>” to disconnect from the Data Module.
12. “RELEASED” is returned when the data path is disconnected.
term
•
Asynchronous data terminal connected to a Data Adapter via a D
1. Press the “VOICE LINE” key to originate.
;
2. Dial the number of the terminal you want to call, “XXXXXX”.
term
3. “XXX YY” is displayed on the D
and the LED of the voice key lights (XXX=trunk type,
YY=trunk number). For example, DDD 36.
4. The remote Data Module or Data Adapter manually or automatically answers the data call and the
remote modem pool is transferred in between the called station and the ISDN channel.
5. The remote modem sends answer tone.
term
6. On receipt of the answer tone, the D
user presses the “DTX” key.
7. “WAIT D XXX YY” is displayed when the called terminal is idle (XXX=trunk type, YY=trunk
number).
term
8. The local modem pool is transferred in between the D
Data Adapter and the local PRI channel.
9. Both modems exchange carrier signals.
term
term
10. “RDY D XXX YY” (for D
Series III)/“READY D XXX YY” (for D
Series E) is displayed
term
on calling D
(XXX=trunk type, YY=trunk number).
11. Data transmission can begin.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 73
Revision 1.0
DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI
3. Unrestricted Data.
•
Asynchronous DTE Connected to a Data Module;
ISDN
Sync. or Async.
DM or DA
Sync. or Async.
DM or DA
DTE
DTE
PRI
PRI
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-3 Asynchronous DTE Connected to a Data Module
1. Enter “DM CALL <ENTER>” on the DTE keyboard; “READY” is returned.
2. Enter the number of the remote DTE: “DIAL XXXXX <ENTER>”.
3. “CALLING” is returned.
4. “WAITING” will be displayed until the call is answered.
5. “OPEN” is returned when the called DTE answers.
6. Data transmission can begin.
7. To terminate the data call, enter “<ESC>-DM <ENTER>”.
8. “ACK” is returned; enter “RLS <ENTER>” to disconnect from the Data Module.
9. “RELEASED” is returned when the data path is disconnected.
term
•
Asynchronous or Synchronous DTE Connected to a D
nection or a modem pool connection);
/Data Adapter (either a straight digital con-
1. Press the “DATA” key to originate.
term
2. “D” appears on the LCD (D ); the DATA key LED illuminates.
3. Dial the remote DTE number: “XXXXX”.
term
4. “WAIT D DTE XXX YY” (D ) will be displayed until the called terminal answers.
term
term
5. “RDY D DTE XXX YY” (for D
Series III)/“READY D XXX YY” (for D
Series E) is dis-
played when the called terminal answers.
6. Data transmission can begin.
7. Press the “DATA” key to disconnect.
8. The data path is disconnected; the LED of the “DATA” key switches off.
CHAPTER 5
Page 74
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
DATA COMMUNICATIONS-PRI
3. Programming
Note: Pooled modems and modems connected to analog stations may be used on PRI channels when a straight
digital data connection is not required. With PRI, modem pooling will always be automatic when
accessing a PRI channel by setting the “AMND” command (Parameter A/D) to 0. If “AMND” (Parameter
A/D) is set to 1, the channel will either use modem pooling or a straight digital path depending on the
number dialed. This number is compared with the PRI link to the other end switch to determine if an
analog or digital extension is being called.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 75
Revision 1.0
DATA UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN-PRI
D-122 DATA UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables data stations to be assigned a set of UNIFORM NUMBERS to distinguish data extensions
from voice extensions.
PBX
PBX
PBX
ISDN(PRI)
ISDN(PRI)
5XXX
DA
DTE
8
DA
CPU
LOCATION
CODE:
HOST
632
COMPUTER
Example: DTE User DIALS 8 + 632-5XXX
2. Operating Procedure
Originating a Data Adapter call using uniform numbering:
1. Dial the private line access code (Usually “8”).
2. Dial the Interoffice number (location code uniform number) and the desired DTE number; RDX (Interoffice
number)-XXXX (Desired DTE number).
3. When the called DTE answers, data communication can begin.
Originating a Data Adapter call using Inter-office coordinate numbering plan:
1. Dial the Interoffice number (location code uniform number).
2. Dial2 the desired DTE number.
3. When the called DTE answers, data communication can begin.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 76
Revision 1.0
DATA UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 2: AUNE - Assign Uniform Numbering Data in a terminating office.
<Example>
Uniform Numbering
8
+
632
+
5XXX
Station No.
Uniform No.
LCR Access Code
Skip Digits
Inter-office coordinate Numbering
5XXX
632
+
Station No.
Uniform No.
Skip Digits
STEP 3: AMND- Assign DC (Destination Code) including ACC and/or Uniform No. and MND (Necessary
Number of digits)
STEP 4: RRC - Allow the restriction between Incoming PRI and Dummy route.
A/D=D
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 77
Revision 1.0
DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)-PRI
D-137 DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)-PRI
1. General Description
This feature automatically routes incoming network exchange calls from an ISDN network and Public/Private
Telecommunication network directly to a preselected station without Attendant assistance. The call can then be
processed by the called party. THREE-WAY CALLING [T-2], CALL TRANSFER [C-10], etc., are handled in
the same manner as any normal trunk call.
2. Operation Procedure
The calling party, outside the system, dials the telephone number as usual. However, the call is answered directly
at a predetermined station, bypassing the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3].
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 147:
DIT supervisory timer for a busy station.
Note:
This index works when System Data 2, Index 11, bit 7=1.
System Data 2,Index 11,bit 7:Will the DIT call to a busy station be routed toATT or queue
to the busy station?
0/1=ATT/Queue
Note: If the call goes to ATT, it will ring in on the BUSY
or ICPT key.
STEP 3: ARSC - The DIT target station receiving the call must be assigned a Route Restriction Class (RSC),
allowing the station to be connected to the trunk. The DIT route must be allowed via Route
Restriction Indexes (RRI) 0 & 1.
STEP 4: ACFR - Designate the type of incoming Call Class Indexes (CCI) which require a Transfer Service
Feature Index (TSFI) = 3, DIRECT-IN TERMINATION. The type of CCI must match
CDN 6 of the DIT route. For Night DIT (NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED [N-1]), allow the
CCI a TSFI = 2, NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED [N-1].
For Day and Night DIT Service-Same Station
STEP 5: ACSI - Assign the Route Number, Trunk Number, and Connection Service Index = 3 for DIT. Then
assign the Tenant Number and Station Number to serve as the DIT station.
For Day DIT Service
STEP 6: ACSA - Assign the Route Number, Trunk Number, Connection Service Index A = 2 for DIT. Then
assign the Tenant Number and Station Number to serve as the DIT station.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 78
Revision 1.0
DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)-PRI
For Day and Night DIT service-Different Stations
STEP 7: ACSA - Assign the Route Number, Trunk Number, Connection Service Index A = 2 for DIT. Then
assign the Tenant Number and Station Number to serve as the DIT station.
ACSI - Assign the Route Number, Trunk Number, Connection Service Index = 4 for NIGHT
CONNECTION-FIXED (DIT) [N-1]. Then assign the Tenant Number and Station
Number to serve as the DIT station.
Night DIT Only
STEP 8: ACSI - Assign the Route Number, Trunk Number, Connection Service Index = 4 for NIGHT
CONNECTION-FIXED (DIT) [N-1]. Then assign the Tenant Number and Station Number
to serve as the DIT station.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 79
Revision 1.0
term
ELAPSED TIME DISPLAY-D
-PRI
term
E-14D ELAPSED TIME DISPLAY-D
1. General Description
-PRI
term
This feature provides an LCD display of the time elapsed while a D
2. Operating Procedure
is connected to a PRI trunk.
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
No programing is required.
CHAPTER 5
Page 80
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING OF STATIONS-PRI
F-21
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING OF STATIONS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides the ability to assign voice station numbers and data station numbers, to any corresponding
instrument location depending solely upon numbering plan limitations.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 16:
system. Assign 3FH.
Enable one- to five-digit station numbering for the
Index 92, bit 3: Must be assigned as data “1”.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve an access code for station numbering. Only the stations with the NND assigned
here will appear on the BLF.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign the station numbering in such a way that the system will differentiate the station
numbering via the access codes programmed here. For the example shown, the following
data is programmed:
For station 31;
TN: 1
For station 321;
TN: 1
For station 322;
TN: 1
ACC: 31
CI: N, H.
SRV: STN
NND: 2
ACC: 321
CI: N, H.
SRV: STN
NND: 3
ACC: 322
CI: N, H.
SRV: STN
NND: 4
STEP 4: ASDT - Assign the station number.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 81
Revision 1.0
FAULTY TRUNK REPORT-PRI
F-26
FAULTY TRUNK REPORT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station to report a noisy or faulty ISDN trunk number by dialing a special access code
before hanging up. The FAULTY TRUNK REPORT consists of Trunk number, Station number, associated
Time Division Switch and reported time. This information is displayed at the MAINTENANCE
ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL [M-18] and/or fault printer.
2. Operating Procedure
To enter a FAULTY TRUNK REPORT:
1. Switchhook flash before disconnecting; receive Special DialTone.
2. Dial theFAULTY TRUNK REPORT access code; receive Service SetTone.
3. The MAT [M-18] records theFAULTY TRUNK REPORT and returns the line to the original connection.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access code.
CI=H, NND=Number of digits for an access code.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign an access code.
CI=H, SRV=SSC, SID=46 (FAULTY TRUNK REPORT)
STEP 3: ASFC - Allow this service restriction. SFI46=1
CHAPTER 5
Page 82
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
term
HANDS-FREE ANSWER BACK-D
-PRI
term
H-14D HANDS-FREE ANSWER BACK-D
1. General Description
-PRI
term
This feature allows the station user to respond to a VOICE CALL-D
2. Operating Procedure
[V-2D] without lifting the handset.
To answer a VOICE CALL [V-2D]:
1. Press the “MIC” key; the LED lights.
2. Respond to call hands-free.
3. Programming
No programming is required.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 83
Revision 1.0
HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI
H-15
HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to access an outside ISDN destination party in the HOT LINE [H-l] service.
2. Operating Procedure
To place a HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI call using a single line telephone:
1. Station A lifts the handset; Station A hears Sender Tone first, and then Ringback Tone.
2. Outside party B lifts the handset; the conversation proceeds.
To place a HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI call using BROKERAGE HOT LINE [B-12]:
1. Station A presses the BROKERAGE HOT LINE key.
2. Station A lifts the handset or presses the “SPKR” key; Station “A” hears Sender Tone first, and then
Ringback Tone.
3. Outside party B lifts the handset; the conversation proceeds.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 7: Does TOLL RESTRICTION apply to SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM [S-3]? 0/1: Yes/No. If TOLL
RESTRICTION applies, construct an RSC that will allow
the station access to the outgoing number.
STEP 2: ASFC - Construct a Service Feature Class that allows Service Feature Index (SFI) 12; SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM [S-3]. Assign this SFC to the Hotline station.
If using a Virtual Circuit (TEC = 18) for the hotline, SFI: 36 (Special Common Battery/
Hotline) must be set to “1” for theVirtual Circuit’s SFC.
STEP 3: ASDT - Assign the HOTLINE-OUTSIDE station as a TEC = 18, Virtual Circuit, or TEC = 14,
Hotline.
TN:
Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)
1:DP (10pps)
2:PB
3:DP/PB
term
12:D
term
13:Data terminal Via D
14:Hotline
15:CAS Line
16:Data Terminal Via Data Module
18:Virtual Circuit
RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)
For assignment of RSC, ARSC command.
SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)
For assignment of SFC, ASFC command.
CHAPTER 5
Page 84
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
HOT LINE-OUTSIDE-PRI
STEP 4: ASPD - Assign the Tenant Number, the Abbreviated Digit Code-ADC, and the CD-Telephone
Number to the sent. Include in the CD the access code of the route.
STEP 5: AHLS - Assign the HOTLINE-OUTSIDE station with the following parameters:
HOT TN: HOTLINE-OUTSIDE Tenant
STN:
TYPE:
HOTLINE-OUTSIDE Station
2 (ADC)
CON TN: Connecting Stations Tenant.
Assign same TN # as in HOT TN:
ADC:
Abbreviated Digit Code of Corresponding Outside Number.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 85
Revision 1.0
INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION-PRI
I-24 INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows an ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] to visually identify the type of service and/or trunk
group which is arriving or waiting to be answered.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System data 2, Indexes 8 & 9, flag the type of incoming calls the Attendant Console should
expect.*
Index 8
bit 0: Listed Directory Number
bit 1: Incoming Station Call
bit 2: Attendant Recall
bit 3: FX
bit 4: WATS
bit 5: CCSA (DID)
bit 6: TIE Line
bit 7: Call Forwarding Busy Line
Index 9
bit 0: Call Forwarding Don’t Answer
bit 1: Call Forwarding Intercept
bit 2: Special Common Battery Station
bit 3: Interposition Transfer
*
System Data 2, Index 8, bits 6 & 7, and System Data 2, Index 9, bits 0-3 can be assigned different meanings
via the AAKP command.
STEP 2: ARTD - Flag the type of route in CDN 6, Trunk Class (TCL).
0: Not used
1: DDD Line (LDN)
2: FX Line (FX)
3: WATS Line (WATS)
4: TIE Line (TIE)
5: CCSA Line (CCSA)
6: Toll Line
7: CAS Line
8: Paging
9: Not used
10: Not used
11: General page
12: Radio page
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 86
Revision 1.0
INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION-PRI
STEP 3: AAKP - This command may be used to change the meaning of the top six keys of the Call
Identification keys of the Attendant Console. (See System Data 2, Indexes 8 & 9.)
The Following functions may be assigned to Key Numbers (KYN) 1-6.
Function:
a: CAS
b: Off-Hook Alarm
c: Priority Call 1
d: Priority Call 2
e: Priority Call 3
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 87
Revision 1.0
INCOMING ISDN CALL TO TIE LINE CONNECTION-PRI
I-25 INCOMING ISDN CALL TO TIE LINE CONNECTION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits an Attendant to connect an incoming ISDN network call, via a tie line, to a station at a
distant PBX.
2. Operating Procedure
To Connect an Incoming Call:
1. The Attendant presses the “LDN” key and answers the incoming PRI trunk call.
2. Dial the Tie Line access code; receive DialTone from distant PBX. (in the case of 2nd DT signaling)
3. Dial the distant PBX extension number.
4. Press the “RELEASE” key.
5. The Tie line and trunk call are connected.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARTD - Assign Tie Line route data.
<Example>
RT : 1
1-OSGS
6-TCL
: 2 2-ONSG
: 4 7-L/T
: 3 3-ISGS
: 1 8-RLP
: 2 4-INSG
: 2 15-LSG
: 3
5-TF
: 3
: 1
: Note 28-ANS
Note: CDN15 (LSG)=4 (for LDT), 5 (for E&M)
The other data must be set “0” (default data).
STEP 2: ATRK - Assign the LENs, TIE Line Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant Number.
STEP 3: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the trunks.
STEP 4: ANPD - Reserve a number level for trunk access. Assign Connection Indexes (CI) for Normal and
Hooking. Number of Necessary Digits is usually 1 or 2. Busy Lamp Field is not activated.
STEP 5: ASPA - Assign the access code as assigned in ANPD above. Type of Service, SRV = OGC/LCR
Outgoing Trunk. Assign the route number associated with this access code.
STEP 6: ARSC - For the incoming PRI (Bch) route, allow for RRI: 0, Incoming Call via the Attendant
Console (with Call Transfer). This Route Restriction Class (RSC) is to be assigned for the
Attendant Console in ATRK. (RSC 0).
For outgoing TIE Line route and for RSC 0, allow for RRI: 2 Outgoing Call via the
ATTCON (with Call Transfer). RSC 0 is to be assigned to theATTCON inATRK.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 88
Revision 1.0
INCOMING ISDN CALL TO TIE LINE CONNECTION-PRI
STEP 7: ARRC - Assign for Alternative Route Index (ARI): A, Incoming Route to Outgoing Route via the
ATTCON/station. Allow the Incoming Route Number (ICRT) of the incoming PRI (Bch)
route to be connected to the Outgoing Route Number (OGRT) of the Outgoing TIE Line
route.
Note: When the tie line is CCIS No.7 link, assign CDN98 (CI)=1 of the ARTD command to all speech route of
CCIS No.7 link.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 89
Revision 1.0
INDIALING THROUGH MAIN-PRI
I-26
INDIALING THROUGH MAIN-PRI
1. General Description
With this feature a call destined for a satellite PBX via DID or Network Inward Dialing (NID) will automatically
be routed to the satellite station by the main PBX over a tie trunk.
DID/NID Call
Main
Office
TRK
Sate-
llite
Office
2. Operating Procedure
1. A 4-digit number is received via DID or NID at a main PBX.
2. One or more sets of one thousand digits or more are designated for each satellite location. A main PBX
checks the digits and routes the call over a tie trunk to the appropriate satellite.
3. The other three digits are then transmitted to the satellite, where the call is switched to the proper station.
4. When a satellite PBX is assigned more than one thousand digits, each set of a thousand digits will refer to
a separate trunk group, while each trunk group will be assigned to a separate incoming switch.
5. When a PBX is used as a main PBX, the thousands of digits may be deleted or left intact when the dialed
digits are pulsed out to the satellite. All four digits may be transmitted to a satellite. A system may also
employ separate trunk groups for each thousand digits assigned to a satellite.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for LCR/LCRS Access Code.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign an access code for LCR/LCRS.
RT=Dummy Route
STEP 3: AMND- Assign Destination Code and the necessary number of digits.
STEP 4: ARNP - Assign Reversed Numbering plan data.
You don’t need this data for the dummy route.
CHAPTER 5
Page 90
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
INDIALING THROUGH MAIN-PRI
STEP 5: ARTD - Assign Tie Line route data and the dummy route data.
For Dummy RT, CDN 6 (TCL)=4, CDN 7 (L/T)=1 and CDN 13 (AC)=1 are necessary.
STEP 6: ATRK - Assign the LENS data of each trunk.
STEP 7: MBTK - Make idle the trunks.
STEP 8: AFRS - Assign NPC (Number Pattern Code) and OPR (Outgoing Route selection pattern Number)
to the dummy route.
STEP 9: AOPR - Make the route selection data using the parameter OPR, SKIP, etc.
STEP 10: ARSC - Allow the route restriction for each trunk.
For Dummy RT, the data assignment of only RRI3 is necessary.
STEP 11: ARRC - Release the tandem connection restriction between the Main Office and the satellite office.
Note: When the satellite office is connected to Main office via CCIS No.7, assign CDN98 (CI)=1 of the ARTD
command to the speech route of CCIS No.7 link. (Refer to [T-44] Transfer Message (TRM))
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 91
Revision 1.0
INTER-PBX COORDINATED STATION NUMBERING PLAN-PRI
I-27 INTER-PBX COORDINATED STATION NUMBERING PLAN-PRI
1. General Description
The INTER-PBX COORDINATED STATION NUMBERING PLAN-PRI [I-27] feature enables the Main-
Satellite network to coordinate the numbering plan for stations in the network. This feature allows a station at
one switch to call a station at another switch by dialing a unique 3- to 7-digit number with no access codes or
pauses for Dial Tone.
This feature can also be arranged to provide a centralized exchange network capability, which channels access
to and from the public network through a single system switch in the coordinated group.
2. Operating Procedure
This feature is used for the Main/Satellite configuration and may also be provided with main/tributary
configuration. Stations at the main and satellite may dial each other without an intervening Dial Tone. The
dialing plan for an inter-PBX call is the same as for an intra-PBX call. With this arrangement different initial
digits are assigned to stations on different systems.
Access PRI
Trunk
5XXX
Main
PBX
Attendant
Tie Trunks
3XXX
4XXX
Satellite PBX
Tributary PBX
All switches have a coordinated station numbering feature.
Example 1: A station user at the satellite switch dials 5XXX to call a station at the Main switch.
Example 2: A station user at the Main switch dials 3XXX to call a station at the Satellite switch and 4XXX to
call a station at the Tributary switch.
3. Programming
CHAPTER 5
Page 92
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
ISDN INDIVIDUAL CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION (ICLID)
ISDN INDIVIDUAL CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION (ICLID)
1. General Description
I-28
The ICLID feature is used to deliver a calling-party’s number through the Public ISDN network to a called-party
in the same PBX.
7000
SID
PBX
A
6250
7252
DTMF
TELEPHONE
PRI
SID
DID
PRI
D2term
ISDN
SID of A
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 2: Refer to “When the originating PRI employs “DID” for the terminating call” in “SID TO NETWORK
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 93
Revision 1.0
INTER-OFFICE OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI
I-36 INTER-OFFICE OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature can be employed in a Main-Satellite configuration to allow a satellite station user to queue for
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI [L-31] at the main location. This feature can also be used when all
outgoing ISDN trunks are concentrated at the main location.
Note 1: There are a maximum of 32 “Queuing” per Module Group (MG) available in the system. Therefore,
only 32 stations/MG may utilize OFF-HOOK QUEUING [O-7],-PRI [O-28], OUTGOING TRUNK
QUEUING [O-2], and-PRI [O-24] simultaneously.
Note 2: The connecting patterns available for this service are shown below:
•
•
•
•
•
Non-ISDN trunk to ISDN trunk
CCIS trunk to ISDN trunk
ISDN trunk to Non-ISDN trunk
ISDN trunk to CCIS trunk
ISDN trunk to ISDN trunk
2. Operating Procedure
Operation at the Main location:
1. The Main location receives dialed digits from the Satellite location via ISDN trunk (a TANDEM TIE
TRUNK [T-1]).
2. The Main location determines that no ISDN trunks are available and places the call in an available “Hold
on Queue”.
3. The Main location returns Service Set Tone to the Satellite caller.
4. The Satellite caller remains off-hook, and waits for the call to be completed. (When an ISDN trunk becomes
available, the Satellite caller will be connected.) Note
5. If there are no “Hold on Queue” available, the Main location will return Reorder Tone to the Satellite caller.
6. If the Satellite caller goes on-hook (ISDN trunk releases) while in queue, the assigned “Hold on Queue” is
cleared.
Note: If the Incoming Tie trunk is a “Loop” signal trunk, the caller will hear Service Set Tone while waiting in
queue for a maximum of three minutes. After this period, the trunk will automatically be released.
CHAPTER 5
Page 94
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
INTER-OFFICE OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 42, bit 7: This bit must be assigned as data “0”, continuous
Service Set Tone.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the incoming TIE Line route.
<Example of 2 - WIRE E&M/4 - WIRE E&M>
RT : 2
1-OSGS
6-TCL
:7/6 2-ONSG
: 4 7-L/T
: 3 3-ISGS
: 1 8-RLP
:7/6 4-INSG
: 2 15-LSG
: 3 5-TF
: 3
: 5 41-TDMQ : 1
Data other than the above should be set “0” (default data).
<LCR (S) DUMMY ROUTE>
RT : 31
6-TCL
: 4 7-L/T
: 1 9-TQ
: 1 13-AC
: 1 41-TDMQ : 1
Data other than the above should be set “0” (default data).
STEP 3: ARRC - Allow trunk-to-trunk connection between the incoming route and the outgoing route in
which INTER-OFFICE OFF-HOOK QUEUING will apply. Also allow trunk-to-trunk
connection between the incoming route and the LCR (S) dummy route. Assign both of
these for ARI: D. The outgoing route and the LCR (S) dummy route must be programmed
to allow OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING [0-2]. Ensure that CDN 9, TQ = 1 (Trunk
Queuing) is set for that outgoing route.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 95
Revision 1.0
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
L-31
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows the system to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most economical facility
(DDD). Based on the area code and office code dialed (6-digit analyzing), the system examines the
programming tables and chooses the facilities in the order specified. This service is the only way to access PRI
interface into ISDN.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the access code (usually “9”); receive Second Dial Tone. (When you assigned “2nd DT=1” in the ASPA
command.)
3. Dial the area code, office code and telephone number.
4. The system automatically completes the call via the most economical route.
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 6, bit 0: Should special Sender Tone be sent to station when
connected to a sender? 0/1: No/Yes. (Optional)
bit 2: Should special Sender Tone be sent to the Attendant
Console when connected to a sender? 0/1: No/Yes.
(Optional)
Index 65:
Assign the number of routes in the system.
System Data 2, Index 2, bit 0: What is the sender type for an OG trunk connection to a
station? 0/1: Dial Pulse/Push Button. This data is valid
only when CDN 2, ONSG of Route data is assigned as
data “3”, PB/DP.
bit 1: What is the sender type for an OG trunk to the Attendant
Console?
0/1=Dial Pulse /PB(DTMF)
(This data is valid only when CDN2 (ONSG) of ARTD
is “3”. (PB/DP.)
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the LCR (S) route as shown below. In CDN 13, include the LCR (S) access code in
LCR (S) development.
Assign the LCR (S) Dummy route as shown below:
RT : 31
6-TCL
: 4 7-L/T
: 1 13-AC
: 1
Data other than the above should be set “0” (default data).
CHAPTER 5
Page 96
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
STEP 4: ATRK - Set Originating Register Trunks (ORT) to the system in a quantity calculated from expected
traffic. Registers are located on levels 0-3 of any 8RST circuit card.
Senders must be assigned to the system in a quantity calculated from expected traffic.
Senders are located on levels 4-7 of any 8RST circuit card.
RT: Route Number
Trunk Route Number
Intraoffice Route Number (901-931)
901-ATT
902-ORT
903-IRT
912-ORT for ATT
913-TCFT for ATT
915-
905-Sender
909-DCFT
916-MFCR
917-MFCR
919 to 926-Modem
TK: Trunk Number
TN: Tenant Number
RSC: Route Restriction Class
SFC: Service Feature Class
STEP 5: MBTK - Set the Make Idle status to all register sender trunks.
STEP 6: ANPD - Reserve a level, usually “9”, for LCR or LCR (S) access. Assign Connection Indexes,
CI=N, H; Normal and Hooking (hookswitch). Number of Necessary Digits is 1. Busy Lamp
Field is not activated.
STEP 7: ASPA - Assign the LCR (S) access code, Type of Service, SRV = LCR or SRV = LCRS. Assign
route number for a dummy route associated with this access code.
STEP 8: Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N, H; Normal and Hooking (hookswitch). Assign data “1” for
second Dial Tone, parameter (2nd DT). Assign data “1” to AH parameter if Procedure II is used for
AUTHORIZATION CODE [A-20].
STEP 9: ARNP - Assign the physical route numbers as assigned in ARTD and relate these routes to the LCR
(S) access code as assigned in ASPA for SRV = LCR (S). The LCR (S) access code is
usually “9”. The routes to be assigned will be those routes listed in the various OPRs of the
AOPR command.
Note: These same routes may also be listed in ASPA for SRV = OGC. In that case, these routes may also be
available via direct dial access codes. In ARNP, these access codes are not assigned to implement the
LCRS service in this command. This digit code is the first digit used when assigning ATDP table.
STEP 10: ARSC - LCR (S) utilizes only Bothway or Outgoing Only routes. For these routes, construct allow,
deny, or Toll Restriction applicable tables (Route Restriction Index RRI 2 & 3). Toll
Restriction will be applied to the available route chosen by the LCR (S) selection.
Therefore, if a station user dials a long distance number and is restricted in Toll Restriction
for a DDD and the only available route is a DDD, the call will be denied. Toll Restriction
acts upon the LCR (S) selection. Also, remember to allow the dummy route, the LCR (S)
Dummy Route to all RSCs. Do not toll restrict the dummy route.
STEP 11: AMND- Assign the Maximum Necessary Digit (MND) the system must translate for a proper route
selection.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 97
Revision 1.0
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
STEP 12: AFRS - List the dialing patterns in groups that will be served by a specific sequence of routes. This
determination of routes is labeled as an Outgoing Pattern Route (OPR). In AFRS, program
the Tenant, Route Number (Dummy Route), The Number Code or dialing patterns, and the
OPR to be chosen when these digits are dialed.
STEP 13: AOPR - The AFRS command designates the dialing sequence and the OPR to be selected. The
AOPR defines the routes and in what order these routes will be selected. Assign the
following:
TDPTN No. : Time of Day Pattern Change. If an AFRS assignment, different OPRs will
be required as a function of time. Designate 1-7 for the Time-of-Day Pattern
Change Number (TDPTN) to which this OPR is assigned.
OPR No. :
Outgoing Pattern Route. The number referenced in AFRS, consisting of a
series of routes to be chosen based on number dialed.
Route Advance Number (RA) :
The order in which a route will be selected (0-7).
Route Advance End Display (E) : The last route in the route advance group is indicated
with data “0”. All others are indicated with data “1”.
Route Number : The physical Route Number to be selected as programmed in ARTD.
Skip Digits :
The digits to be skipped when translating the dialed digits in AFRS.
Pattern Number Location :
If digits are to be added after translating the dialed digits in
AFRS, assign a PNL. The digits to be added are
programmed to the respective PNLs in the AADC
command. If no digits are to be added, PNL = 0 should be
assigned.
Overflow Tone : Assign if a tone is wanted for the Last Choice Route. If so, assign data
“1” for DDD.
Priority Restriction Class : Refer to PRIORITY RESTRICTION CLASS in the “EPN
Feature and Specification”. If this is required, assign PRSC
here, using classes 1-15. For all other systems, always assign
PRSC as data “0”.
STEP 14: AADC - If additional digits are required, assign the digits of a Pattern Number Location (PNL) here.
For additional digits totaling 24, use PNL 1-999.
STEP 15: ATCP - A maximum of eight Time-of-Day Pattern changes (0-7) are available whereby the system
will refer to different OPR assignments as a function of time.
Times Setting
TO:
FROM: (In Military Time, and only on the half-hour and hour.)
PATTERN NUMBER: (0-7).
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 98
Revision 1.0
LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI
L-32
LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides automatic routing of outgoing ISDN calls over alternative customer facilities based on the
DDD number. The system will select the most economical route available at the time of connection. The pattern
of alternate routing can be changed up to 8 times per day based on a pre-arranged time schedule.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the access code (usually “9”); receive Second Dial Tone. (When you assigned “2nd DT=1” in the ASPA
Command.)
3. Dial the area code, office code, and telephone number.
4. The system automatically completes the call via the most economical route available.
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 99
Revision 1.0
LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI
L-33 LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI
1. General Description
This service feature provides an ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] to override the LCR-TIME OF DAY
ROUTING-PRI [L-32] pattern and then an alternate routing pattern group will be selected.
2. Operating Procedure
To set LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the LCR-ATTENDANT MANUALOVERRIDE-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI [L-40] pattern number (1 to 7) Note 1; receive Service Set
Tone.
4. Press the “RELEASE” key.
To cancel LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the LCR-ATTENDANT MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI access code; receive Special Dial Tone. The
display of the LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI [L-32] pattern number is shown.
3. Dial 0 to cancel; receive Service Set Tone.
4. Press the “RELEASE” key.
Note 1: TDPTN of the AOPR/PTN of the ATCP command.
Note 2: During this operation, the following is displayed on the display of the ATTCON.
3
KIND: 3 is displayed in this service.
PTN:
0=Cancel
1-7=PTN
KIND
PTN
3. Programming
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for an access code for this service.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign Access Code, CI=N (Normal), SRV=SSC and SID=60
STEP 4: ATCP - Assign the Time of Day Pattern data.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 100
Revision 1.0
LCR-AUTOMATIC OVERFLOW TO DDD-PRI
L-34
LCR-AUTOMATIC OVERFLOW TO DDD-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides optional routing of ISDN network calls via off-network facilities from a point on the
network where all on-network routes are busy or none are provided.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Assignment Procedure
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 101
Revision 1.0
LCR-CLOCKED MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI
L-35 LCR-CLOCKED MANUAL OVERRIDE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits the system to override the LCR-TIME OF DAY ROUTING-PRI [L-32] pattern during the
pre-determined time assigned through the MAT.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Assignment Procedure
STEP 2: ACMO- Assign the specific data and time.
CHAPTER 5
Page 102
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
LAST NUMBER CALL-PRI
L-42
LAST NUMBER CALL-PRI
1. General Description
When a station user originates an ISDN trunk call, this service feature allows the calling station user to recall
the same destination by dialing only the special code instead of dialing all the digits of the number.
Note: The maximum number of dial digits to which this service is applicable is 18.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the desired party’s number.
3. The call has not been established; Busy Tone or Recorder Tone is heard.
4. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
5. Dial the LAST NUMBER CALL access code (max. 3 digits).
6. The system will automatically redial the last number dialed from that station.
3. Assignment Procedure
STEP 1: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N;
Normal. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 2: ASPA - Assign an access code to LAST NUMBER CALLED, SID = 44. Assign Connection Status
Index (CI) for Normal service.
STEP 3: ASFC - Assign the stations to receive the feature LAST NUMBER CALLED a Service Feature
Class that allows SFI = 44.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 103
Revision 1.0
term
LAST NUMBER CALLED-D
-PRI
term
L-42D LAST NUMBER CALLED-D
-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature allows a D
feature, the D
user to redial the telephone numbers previously dialed from the terminal. With this
term
user can choose any destination out of the latest five calls, which have been stored in the
memory of the system, and place a call without having to redial the full number.
Note: The maximum digits of the destination is 32 digits.
2. Operating Procedure
1. How to check the dialed numbers stored in the memory (up to 5 destinations):
term
(a) Press the LINE/SPD key on a D
.
•
•
•
The Prime Line lights Green.
The Speaker Lamp lights Green.
term
Receive Dial Tone from the speaker with the following display on the D
.
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
LNR [#]/SPD [ ] – 1
811625643
LNR [#]SPEED [ ] – 1
811625643
term
(a) Press the LINE/SPD key on the D
again.
•
•
•
The Prime Line lights Green.
The Speaker Lamp lights Green.
Receive Dial Tone from the speaker with the following display on the D
term
.
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
LNR [#]/SPD [ ] – 2
25191
LNR [#]/SPEED [ ] – 2
25191
Note: The indication on the display is changed in sequence by pressing the LINE/SPD key. Once the stored
telephone number display reaches “LNR[#]/SPD[ ]-5”, “LNR[#]/SPD[ ]-1” appears again by pressing
the LINE/SPD key.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 104
Revision 1.0
term
LAST NUMBER CALLED-D
-PRI
2. How to originate a call:
term
(a) Press the LINE/SPD key on a D
.
•
•
•
The Prime Line lights Green.
The Speaker Lamp lights Green.
Receive Dial Tone from the speaker with the following display on the D
term
.
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
LNR [#]/SPD [ ] – 1
811625643
LNR [#]/SPEED [ ] – 1
811625643
(a) Repeat the above procedure until you reach your desired destination.
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
LNR [#]/SPD [ ] – 4
82625191
LNR [#]SPEED [ ] – 4
82625191
term
(a) Press # to originate your call while the desired destination is being displayed on the D
.
•
•
•
The Prime Line lights Green.
The Speaker Lamp lights Green.
term
Receive Ringback Tone from the speaker with the following display on the D
.
82625191
10:24
AM
AM
15
FRI
(a) The called party answers the call.
•
•
The Prime Line lights Green.
The Speaker Lamp is OFF.
82625191
15
10:24
FRI
3. Programming
term
STEP 1: ASDT - Assign a D
with TEC (= Telephone Equipment Class) 12.
STEP 2: AKYD - Assign a programmable line/feature key as the LAST NUMBER CALLED key, if
necessary.
KYI: Service Index 1 (= Feature Key)
FKY: Function Key Number 8 (= LAST NUMBER CALLED)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 105
Revision 1.0
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-PRI
L-44
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-PRI
1. General Description
This service feature routes Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls from both ISDN/non-ISDN network to a
preselected station within the system, when the Night mode has been entered.
2. Operating Procedure
To answer LDN NIGHT CONNECTION calls:
1. An incoming LDN call in Night mode is automatically routed to a preselected LDN NIGHT
CONNECTION station within the system.
2. The calling party receives Ringback Tone.
3. The ringing signal is sent to the LDN NIGHT CONNECTION station.
4. The LDN NIGHT CONNECTION station goes off-hook to answer the incoming call. If necessary, this
station can transfer the incoming call to another station within the system using the CALL TRANSFER-
ALL CALLS [C-11] service.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ALDN - Assign LDN number and its transfer destination.
TN:
Tenant Number
LDN: Listed Directory Number (must match station numbering plan)
Night Transfer: Y/N
If no, then LDN will only go to Attendant.
If yes, then the following parameters will be enabled:
Type: Night Transfer Type
1: Station number
2: Outside (up to 8 digits)
3: ADC (when more than 8 digits are required)
For Type 1, assign station number here.
STEP 2: ACFR - Assign the TSFI: 2 (Night Connection-Fixed) to be allowed CCI: 1 (LDN). This allows
LDN to go to night transfer destination.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 106
Revision 1.0
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-OUTSIDE-PRI
L-46
LDN NIGHT CONNECTION-OUTSIDE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature routes Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls from both ISDN/non-ISDN network to a preselected
station outside the system when the system is in Night mode.
2. Operating Procedure
To answer LDN NIGHT CONNECTION calls:
1. An incoming LDN call in Night mode is automatically routed to a preselected LDN NIGHT
CONNECTION station outside the system.
2. The calling party receives Ringback Tone.
3. The call is sent out to the outside station.
4. The outside station answer the call.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ALDN - Assign LDN number and its transfer destination.
TN:
Tenant Number
LDN: Listed Directory Number (must match station numbering plan)
Night Transfer: Y/N
If no, then LDN will only go to Attendant.
If yes, then the following parameters will be enabled:
TYPE: Night Transfer Type
1: Station number
2: Outside (up to 8 digits)
3: ADC (when more than 8 digits are required)
STN: For Types 1&2.
For type 2, assign access code and outside number here.
(A CCIS remote office station number can be input here also).
ADC: For Type 3.
Input ADC number desired as assigned in ASPD command.
STEP 2: ASPD - Assign an access code and outside number to an ADC (000-999). This step is required only
if access code and outside number are greater than eight digits.
STEP 3: ACFR - Assign TESFI:2 (Night Connection-Fixed) to be allowed CCI:1(LDN). This allows LDN
to go to Night transfer destination.
STEP 4: ARRC - The incoming route of the LDN must allow trunk-to-trunk connection to the outgoing
destination route and to the LCR dummy route: ARI: D. (Direct Connection.)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 107
Revision 1.0
LCR-SPECIAL LINE WARNING TONE-PRI
L-49 LCR-SPECIAL LINE WARNING TONE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user or an Attendant to receive a Warning Tone that indicates an expensive ISDN
trunk line is in use.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Assignment Procedure
Refer to “[L-16] LCR-SPECIAL LINE WARNING TONE” in NEAX2400 IPX Feature Programming Manual.
Note: AOPR - Assign OVFT = 1 to PRI (Bch) route.
CHAPTER 5
Page 108
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS-PRI
M-71
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides access to all types of external and customer provided equipment/facilities such as Tie
[T-3], and Exchange Network along with PAGING [P-1].
2. Operating Procedure
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS-PRI is accomplished via System Data at the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT).
3. Assignment Procedure
STEP 1: ARTD - Refer to the Feature listing for the type of trunk route to be accessed.
STEP 2: ATRK - Assign the LENs, Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant Number.
STEP 3: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the trunks.
STEP 4: ANPD - Assign a level for trunk access. Assign Connection Indexes (CI) for Normal and Hooking
service. Number of Necessary Digits is assigned according to a predetermined numbering
plan. Busy Lamp Field is not activated.
STEP 5: ASPA - Assign the access code as indicated by the level assigned in ANPD. Type of Service, SRV
= OGC for Outgoing trunks.
STEP 6: ARSC - Assign a Route Restriction Class (RSC) that is allowed in Route Restriction Indexes (RRI)
0, 1, 2 and 3 to the station that is allowed access to these trunks.
STEP 7: ASDT - Assign an RSC to the stations which allows access to these trunks.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 109
Revision 1.0
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION-PRI
M-72 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides for incoming PRI trunks to be denied access to particular trunk groups such as Tie [T-3],
Exchange Network, or PAGING [P-1].
2. Operating Procedure
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION-PRI is accomplished via System Data at the MAINTENANCE
ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (MAT) [M-18].
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bits 4&5:Should a restricted station be routed to the Attendant
Console or receive Reorder Tone?
Reorder Tone: bit 4 = 0, bit 5 = 0
Attendant Console: bit 4 = 1, bit 5 = 0.
STEP 2: Follow the procedure for MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS[M-2]. By assigning the ARSC
command, restrict RSCs from receiving certain routes. PRI 3: RES must be “2” if call restriction to
go to ATTCON. Then assign the restricted RSCs to stations via the ASDT or ASCL command. When
assigning the ARRC command, restrict incoming TIE lines from accessing certain routes.
CHAPTER 5
Page 110
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
MUSIC ON HOLD-PRI
M-73
MUSIC ON HOLD-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a party to hear music while in the HOLD [C-6], TRANSFER [C-10,C-11], or CAMP-ON
[A-1] conditions.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required for this software-controlled feature.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 64, bit 7 = 1 (MUSIC-ON-HOLD is in service.)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 111
Revision 1.0
MODEM POOLING-PRI
M-74
MODEM POOLING-PRI
1. General Description
The MODEM POOLING-PRI [M-74] feature allows any synchronous or synchronous data station (DTE)
term
connected to a D
Data Adapter to have access to off-premise devices (other terminals, mainframes, personal
computers, etc.) using Modem Pools. Also, off-premise devices can gain access to the Data Adapters through
incoming Modem Pools. Modem pools provide the capability to share modems among users for outgoing and
incoming communications.
DATA LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6-DIGIT [D-49] and other standard features can be utilized for long
distance data calls.
2. Service Conditions
1. Up to eight Modem Pool Groups can be assigned: eight bothway, four incoming, four outgoing, or any
combination thereof.
2. One modem in the group is selected by the DTE at the time of connection.
3. LEAST CALL ROUTING can be used for optimization of long distance data calls.
4. Incoming MODEM POOLING capabilities are also provided via DIT, DID, or the Attendant.
5. Modems must be compatible.
6. NEC Modems tested and certified to work with the MODEM POOLING-PRI [M-74] feature are:
•
•
•
NEC 212 AE
NEC DSP2420 300/1200 bps
NEC DATAX SP2424 AA
300/1200 bps
Consult NEC for other types of Modems.
7. Modems can be selected by the user. Refer to MANUAL MODEM POOL SELECTION [M-32] and
ATTRIBUTE DATA ENTRY [A-39].
8. MODEM POOLING-PRI is also for Digital-to-Analog/Analog-to-Digital translation. Refer to INTRA
MODEM POOLING [I-15].
9. Acoustically Coupled Modems, Limited Distance Modems, Line Drivers, and DSUs cannot be attached to
the Modem Pooling card.
10. Consideration should be given to the Modems capability to recognize a distinctive ringing pattern when
defining incoming trunk ringing.
11. Speed Select via pin 24 on the EIA RS-232C connector is not implemented.
12. Auto Dial or Intelligent Modems must be strapped for manual operation to work on the Modem Pooling
card.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 112
Revision 1.0
MODEM POOLING-PRI
3. Operating Procedure
Refer to “[M-21] MODEM POOLING” in Feature Programming Manual.
4. Assignment Procedure
Refer to “[M-21] MODEM POOLING” in Feature Programming Manual.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 113
Revision 1.0
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
M-75 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a call from the ISDN network to a station set to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
[C-95] to be forwarded multiple times to a predesignated idle station.
2. Operating Procedure
To set CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI[C-95] from an individual station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI[C-95] from an individual station:
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI cancel code; receive Service SetTone.
To set CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI[C-95] from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI access code; receive Special DialTone.
3. Dial the TENANT [T-12] number (2 or 3 Digits).
4. Dial the originating station number.
5. Dial the desired target station number; receive Service Set Tone.
To cancel CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI[C-95] from the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3]:
1. Press an idle “LOOP” key.
2. Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI cancel code; receive Special Dial tone.
3. Dial the TENANT [T-12] number (2 or 3 Digits).
4. Dial the originating station number; receive Service Set Tone.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 4, bit 6: One burst of ringing at forwarding station when
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS is in
service?
0/1: No/Yes.
Index 69,bit 1:
A burst of Ringback Tone to alert the person receiving a call
that this is a MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL
CALLS call. In service? 0/1: No/Yes. Normally assigned
as data “0”.
System Data 2,Index 6,bit 4:Enable stations set for MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-
ALL CALLS be allowed to use their phones normally. If
data “0” is assigned, the station will only be able to call
the Attendant Console. Assign on a per-tenant basis.
CHAPTER 5
Page 114
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-PRI
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access and cancel. Assign for Normal. Assign NND in
accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS entry, SID =
8 and to MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS cancel SID = 9. Assign a
Connection Status Index (CI) for Normal service.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign the stations to activate MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS a Service
Feature Class that allows SFI = 7.
term
STEP 5: AKYD - For D
sets, MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS may be assigned to a
programmable line/feature key. Assign KYI = 1 and FKY = 2.
STEP 6: ATNR - Allow tenant-to-tenant connection for Inter- and Intra-tenant connections. Assign Tenant
Restriction Index (TRI) = 1. For this service feature to be set by the Attendant Console,
assign Inter- and Intra-Tenant connection via the Attendant Console TRI = 3. Also allow
TRI = 0, station-to-station calling.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 115
Revision 1.0
NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI
N-20
NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI
1. General Description
This feature routes ISDN calls normally directed to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] to a preselected
common station within the system when the Night mode has been entered.
2. Operating Procedure
To answer NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI calls:
1. Incoming calls to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] in the Night Mode are automatically transferred to
a preselected NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI station.
2. Calling party hears Ringback Tone.
3. Ring signal is sent to the NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI station.
4. NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI station goes off-hook to answer incoming call. If necessary, this
station can transfer the incoming call to another station within the system using CALL TRANSFER-ALL
CALLS [C-11] feature.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 147: DIT supervisory timer for a busy station. How often will the
CPU look at the Idle/Busy status of the station for rerouting
the DIT call to the destination? Always leave this index as
00H.
STEP 2: ACSI - Assign Route Number, Trunk Number, Connection Service Index of “4” for NIGHT
CONNECTION-FIXED, and the Tenant Number and Station Number to serve as the
NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED station.
STEP 3: ACFR - Allow a Transfer Service Feature Index of 2, NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED, for the
types of incoming calls listed in Call Class Index (CCI).
CHAPTER 5
Page 116
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
NIGHT CONNECTION-FLEXIBLE-PRI
N-21
NIGHT CONNECTION-FLEXIBLE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides arrangements to route ISDN calls normally directed to the ATTENDANT CONSOLE
[A-3] to a preselected station on a flexibly assignable basis within the system, when the Night mode has been
entered.
2. Operating Procedure
Answering operation is the same as that for NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED-PRI [N-20].
Each evening, before placing the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] into the Night Connection mode, the
Attendant programs CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-5] from the NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED
[N-20] station to the desired station.
3. Programming
STEP 1: NIGHT CONNECTION-FLEXIBLE is a combination of CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
[C-5] and NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED [N-1] features.
STEP 2: CLASS OF SERVICE-INDIVIDUAL [C-15]-The station chosen as the Night Connection-Flexible
station should be assigned a CLASS OF SERVICE-INDIVIDUAL [C-15] capable of performing the
Night station functions.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 117
Revision 1.0
NON-DELAY OPERATION-PRI
N-22
NON-DELAY OPERATION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows the ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] to place any calling party on hold, dial the call, and
connect the calling and called parties.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the “ANSWER” or “ATND” key.
2. Press the “START” key.
3. Dial the exchange network access code.
4. Dial the desired telephone number.
5. Press the “RELEASE” key.
6. The parties are connected.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARSC - Allow restriction RRI2 = 1 (Route Restriction via the Attendant).
STEP 2: ASDT - Assign a Route Restriction Class (RSC) that allows outgoing access to the route via the
Attendant Console to station.
CHAPTER 5
Page 118
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE-SYSTEM-PRI
N-29
NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE-SYSTEM-PRI
1. General Description
This is a night transfer service on a system basis enabling a ring down call to be transferred to a preselected
station outside the PBX via ISDN network when Night mode has been set.
2. Operating Procedure
1. The Attendant sets Night mode.
(Night key, PB, Jack Extraction, MB)
2. Ring down call terminates from a trunk.
3. The call is transferred to another station in accordance with NIGHT CONNECTION OUTSIDE-SYSTEM-
PRI data.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 77, bit 0: DAY/NIGHT mode Changeover via handset jack 0/1: Not
Required/Required.
STEP 2: ALDN - Assign LDN, allow night transfer, assign TYPE = 3, and the ADC number assigned in
ASPD.
STEP 3: ASPD - Assign abbreviated digit code (ADC) and access code to the dialed (000-999). This step is
required only if the access code and outside number are greater than eight digits.
STEP 4: ACFO - Assign call forwarding data, CF = 4: Night Connection, and the ADC assigned in ASPD.
STEP 5: ARRC - Allowing incoming route to out-going route. Use Alternative Route Index (ARI) D for
Direct Connection. Three possible restriction (RES) may be assigned; data “0” =
connection is restricted; data “1” = connection is allowed; or data “2” = toll restriction is
required. For NIGHT CONNECTION-OUTSIDE-SYSTEM, toll restriction is not
required.
STEP 6: ACFR - Assign Transfer Service Feature Index (TSFI) = 2: Direct In Termination Night Only, to be
allowed CCI: 1 (LDN). This allows LDN to go to Night transfer destination.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 119
Revision 1.0
NAILED DOWN CONNECTION-PRI
N-31
NAILED DOWN CONNECTION-PRI
1. General Description
This service feature provides the logical equivalence of a hardware connection between ISDN trunk and station/
trunk. A NAILED DOWN CONNECTION is constantly maintained in the system’s software. NAILED DOWN
CONNECTION data is programmed via the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).
Note: The Following connections are supported by this service.
ISDN trunk
ISDN trunk
CCIS trunk
Non-ISDN trunk
↔
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 60, bit 4 =1 (Nailed Down Connection is in service)
STEP 2: AFCD - Assign the LENS of two pieces of equipment to be connected by Nailed Down Connection.
CHAPTER 5
Page 120
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-PRI
O-24
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user, upon encountering an ISDN trunk busy signal, to dial a specified access code
and enter a first-in, first-out queue. As soon as an ISDN outgoing trunk becomes available, stations in the queue
will be called back on a first-come, first-served basis.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Dials the desired number to the ISDN trunk; receives Busy Tone.
2. Press the switchhook; receives Special Dial Tone.
3. Dials the OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING access code and receives Service Set Tone.
4. Replaces the handset.
When an ISDN trunk becomes available, a station in the queue is called back.
To cancel
1. Lifts the handset; receives Dial Tone.
2. Dials the OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING cancel code; receives Service SetTone.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 68, bit 3: Enables automatic cancel timer as set in System Data 1,
Index 159. 0/1: -/Enable.
Index 159:
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING (OGQ) release timer.
Standard data of 00H for 30 minutes may be assigned.
System Data 2, Index 4, bit 0: Should the access code for CALL BACK and
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING be the same? 0/1: No/
Yes.
bit 1: Enable Automatic OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING?
0/1: No/Yes.
bit 2: Enable OFF-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING
for the Attendant Console? 0/1: No/Yes.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for service feature access and cancel. Assign Connection Indexes,
CI = B. Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 121
Revision 1.0
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-PRI
STEP 3: ASPA - If System Data 2, Index 4, bit 0 is assigned for separate access codes, assign an access
code to OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING assign, SRV
= SSC, SID = 19 and to OUTGOING TRUNK
QUEUING cancel, SRV = SSC, SID = 20. Assign SID
= 19 for a Connection Index of Busy and SID = 20 for a
Connection Index of Normal. If the access codes are the
same, either the access codes for OUTGOING TRUNK
QUEUING or the access codes for CALL BACK may
be assigned.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign SFI1=1.
STEP 5: ARTD - Routes to be used for OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING must be flagged in CDN 9, TQ.
Trunk Queuing Service. Always allow queuing to the LCR (S) Dummy route.
term
STEP 6: AKYD - Set the following data to assign CALL BACK Key on a D
BACK)
. KYI: 1 FKY: 5 (= CALL
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 122
Revision 1.0
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-DELUXE-PRI
O-26
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-DELUXE-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows station users according to their Service Feature Class to queue for an outgoing ISDN trunk
when all call routes are busy. This feature allows specific routes to be queued in a timed interval depending on
the user’s Service Feature Class (SFC). If on-hook queuing is used, the system will send a Ringback Tone to the
station when a trunk becomes available. On or off-hook queuing may be assigned to stations within a tandem
network, as well as stations at main and satellite PBXs.
The system provides an off-hook queuing capability to Attendants and an optional priority queuing feature.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Outgoing trunk
The Busy Tone will be sent to the calling station, when no ISDN trunks are available.
The user presses the switchhook, and receives Special Dial Tone.
Dials the OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING access code, receives the Service Set Tone and replaces the
handset.
To cancel on-hook queuing, the user must go off-hook and dial the OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING
cancel code. User receives the Service Set Tone and replaces the handset.
If the calling party does not answer the ringback within thirty seconds, the call will be removed from queue.
2. Off-Hook trunk Queuing:
When off-hook queuing is used, the Service Set Tone will be sent to the calling station when no outgoing
ISDN trunks are available. The Service Set Tone indicates that the calling station has been placed in an off-
hook queue.
To cancel off-hook queuing from a station or tie line, the user merely goes on-hook.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 123
Revision 1.0
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-DELUXE-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 68, bit 3: OG Trunk Queuing (On-Hook) Automatic Cancel
0/1=Out/In Service
Index 159:
Assign the OG-Trunk Queuing Automatic Cancel Timer,
when System Data 1, Index 68, bit 3 is “1”. (Default
data=30 min.)
System Data 2, Index 4, bit 0: Call Back and OG Trunk Queuing access code.
0/1=Separate/Common
bit 1: Automatic Setting of OG Trunk Queuing
0/1=Not Required/Required.
Note: For OG Trunk (ON HOOK) Queuing, bit 1=0
For Off Hook Queuing, bit 1=1
System Data 3, Index 3, bit 5: 3-Burst for Ringer Pattern 5
0/1=Not required/Required
Index 7:
Ringer Pattern 5 for this service.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for OG Trunk (ON-HOOK) Queuing.
CI=N and B.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign the access code for OG Trunk (ON-HOOK) Queuing.
CI=B, SRV=SSC, SID=19 (To set)
CI=N, SRV=SSC, SID=20 (To Cancel)
STEP 4: ARTD - Assign the OG Trunk Queuing-Deluxe service for the OG route.
CDN9 (TQ)=1
CDN41 (TDMQ)=1 (for Tandem Queuing)
STEP 5: ASFC - Allow OG Trunk Queuing-Deluxe to the SFC of the station.
SFI62 (OG Trunk Queuing-Deluxe)=1
Note: For Off-Hook Queuing, the following data is required as well as above.
SFI21 (Off-Hook OG Queuing)=1
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 124
Revision 1.0
OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI
O-28
OFF-HOOK QUEUING-PRI
1. General Description
This service allows a station user encountering busy ISDN trunk to remain off-hook and automatically enter a
first-in, first-out queue. As soon as an outgoing ISDN trunk becomes available, the switch connects the next call
to this trunk.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. When no trunks are available, the call automatically enters an available queue.
2. The caller receives Service SetTone.
3. When a trunk becomes available, the dialed number is automatically sent forward.
4. If the caller goes on-hook while in queue, the assigned queue is cleared.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 4, bit 1: Automatic Setting of OG Trunk Queuing
0/1 = Not required/Required.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the following data for the Queuing route and the dummy route CDN9 (TQ) = 1
STEP 3: ASFC - Allow a service restriction as follows.
SFI21 (Off-Hook Queuing) = 1
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 125
Revision 1.0
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-ATTENDANT-PRI
O-30 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-ATTENDANT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows an ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] encountering a busy ISDN trunk to remain off-hook
and automatically enter a first-in, first-out queue. As soon as an outgoing ISDN trunk becomes available, the
switch connects the next call to that trunk.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Dial the access code and the desired ISDN trunk number.
2. When no trunks are available, the call automatically enters an available queue slot.
3. The Attendant receives Service Set Tone.
4. When a trunk becomes available, the dialed number is automatically sent forward.
5. If the Attendant goes on-hook while in queue, the assigned queue slot is cleared.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 4, bit 2: Off-Hook OG Queuing for Attendant.
0/1 = Out/In Service.
STEP 2: ASFC - Assign 1 (= Allowed) in SFI21 (= Off-Hook OG Queuing) for SFC0.
CHAPTER 5
Page 126
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
OVERFLOW-UCD-PRI
O-32
OVERFLOW-UCD-PRI
1. General Description
1. When a call from an ISDN trunk has terminated to UCD [U-1] Group A and this incoming call has
encountered all stations busy in Group A, the call is transferred to UCD [U-1] Group B if Group B is
registered as the overflow destination.
UCD
GROUP A
ALL BUSY
UCD
GROUP B
CALL
TERMINATION
OVERFLOW
2. If all stations in Group B to which the call has been transferred by the OVERFLOW-UCD service are busy,
the call is registered in the queue in UCD [U-1] Group A.
UCD
GROUP A
ALL BUSY
CALL REGISTERED
IN GROUP A
UCD
GROUP B
ALL BUSY
CALL
TERMINATION
OVERFLOW
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 127
Revision 1.0
OVERFLOW-UCD-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASHU - Assign the required data for the UCD Group:
TN:
Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
CNT: Number of stations to be entered (recommended maximum of 100 stations).
ADD: Number of station to be added (recommended maximum of 100 stations).
STN: Station Numbers of the stations included in the UCD group.
STEP 2: AUOG - Assign the UCD OVERFLOW data via this command. Assign the following:
TN-A, STN-A: Tenant Number and Station Number which belong to a UCD group.
TN-B, STN-B: Tenant Number and Station Number of a member station in a UCD
group to be hunted in the case where the UCD group designated by
TN-A and STN-A happens to be busy.
TRANSLATION: When UCD group A is busy, calls will overflow to UCD group B.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 128
Revision 1.0
PEG COUNT-PRI
P-37
PEG COUNT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits traffic studies and traffic analysis information to be accessed from the MAINTENANCE
ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL [M-18] and to be printed out.
2. Operating Procedure
Refer to System Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3. Programming
Refer to System Operation and Maintenance Manual.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 129
Revision 1.0
PRIMARY CALL RESTRICTION-PRI
P-38
PRIMARY CALL RESTRICTION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows the system to restrict outgoing ISDN calls according to the specific called number. This
restriction is controlled on the basis of the first seven, eight, nine, or all ten digits dialed.
2. Operating Procedure
The system checks the dialed number and the restricted numbers and if these numbers match the call is
restricted.
3. Programming
STEP 1: APCR - Assign the number to be restricted and the condition of restriction (Allow or Restricted) to
each RSC.
CHAPTER 5
Page 130
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
PRI TRUNK TO TIE LINE CONNECTION WITH PAD CONTROL
PRI TRUNK TO TIE LINE CONNECTION WITH PAD CONTROL
1. General Description
P-39
This feature provides a switchable transmission pad for PRI trunks, which allows tandem connections.
Necessary PAD CONTROL is activated to protect against echo.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: APAD - Assign the Pad data required for the Tandem connection. Assign the following:
KIND:
ICRT:
T (Tandem Connection) or S (Station)
Incoming Route Number
OGRT:
Outgoing Route Number
SFC:
Service Feature Class
IC PAD:
Incoming PAD Data (1-15)
OG PAD: Outgoing PAD Data (1-15)
RT: Route Number
PAD DATA: Note
Note: See “Circuit Card Manual”.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 131
Revision 1.0
PAGING TRANSFER-PRI
P-47
PAGING TRANSFER-PRI
1. General Description
This feature will allow a station user to transfer a paged call to a party that has been placed on hold.
2. Operating Procedure
While a station user is engaged in a C.O. line call:
1. The Station user presses the switchhook flash key; receives Special DialTone.
2. Station user dials the PAGING access code; receives continuous Ringback Tone for approximately one
second.
3. Station user pages the desired party.
Following two are the methods that the paged user answers:
1. Non-Delay System; On dialing the PAGING Answer access code, the party paged is immediately connected
to the PAGING station.
2. PAGING TRANSFER Supervision; The PAGING station user replaces the handset after the page. By
dialing the PAGING Answer access code, the paged party is directly connected to party on hold.
For Non-Delay Systems; when a PAGING station replaces the handset after talking with the paged party, the
held party is directly connected to the paged party.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 73, bits 0&1: b1 b0
0
1
1
1
0
1
For MEET-ME PAGE. Non-Delay service.
For MEET-ME PAGE. Delay service.
For MEET-ME PAGE. Delay service with Call
Transfer.
bit 3:
Are PAGE cancel codes provided for each route?
0/1: Per route/Common to all routes.
Index 74, bits 0&3: Assign the cancel timer for unanswered page.
Assign data 00H for 30 seconds.
(0-F+1)×30 = Cancel Timer.
System Data 2, Index 1, bits 0&1: Consultation Hold allowed or denied. 00: Denied;
01: Originating and Terminating Calls allowed;
Tandem Call Denied; 11: All calls allowed.
CHAPTER 5
Page 132
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
PAGING TRANSFER-PRI
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the paging route as shown below:
RT : 1
1-OSGS
8-RLP
: 2 2-ONSG
: 2 15-LSG
: 3 5-TF
: 0
: 1 6-TCL
: 8 7-L/T
: 1
Data other than the above should be set “0” (default data).
STEP 3: ATRK - Assign the LENs, Paging Trunk Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant Number.
STEP 4: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the Paging trunks.
STEP 5: ANPD - Reserve levels for trunk access and for PAGE answer and cancel codes. Assign the trunk
access level for a Connection Indexed (CI) of Normal and momentary switchhook flash
(Hooking) service. Number of Necessary Digits is Max.3. Busy Lamp Field is not
activated.
If the PAGE answer and cancel codes reside in a level reserved for features, then assign
according to a predetermined numbering plan. If the PAGE answer and cancel codes reside
in a separate level, then assign for a Connection Index (CI) of Normal only. The number of
Necessary Digits is usually two and the Busy Lamp Field is off.
STEP 6: ASPA - Assign Paging Route access code. Type of Service, SRV = OGC. Assign the proper route
number that is associated with this Paging trunk access code. Assign for CI = normal and
Hooking.
Assign the PAGE answer and cancel access code. Type of Service, SRV = PAGA and SRV
= PAGC. Assign the proper route number that is associated with this access code. Assign
for CI = normal.
STEP 7: ARSC - Allow RRI: 2 & 3 access to this route for the RSCs assigned to stations given access to the
paging routes. Allow RRI: 0 & 1 on the incoming route to be transferred to the RSCs given
access to the page answer.
STEP 8: ASFC - Assign station to receive PAGING TRANSFER a Service Feature Class that allows SFI =
38. This allows a station to dial PAGE answer codes.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 133
Revision 1.0
PRI FAILSAFE ROUTING
P-49
PRI FAILSAFE ROUTING
1. General Description
When call origination via ISDN network is not available due to failure, etc., this feature allows the call to be
placed via alternative route (Public Switched Network.)
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARTD - Assign the expansion route class data for dummy route. The expansion route class data of
the dummy routed is ADVPRA (CDN : 111) = 1.
CHAPTER 5
Page 134
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
RESTRICTION FROM OUTGOING CALLS-PRI
R-35
RESTRICTION FROM OUTGOING CALLS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature automatically denies preselected station lines within the system the ability to place outgoing ISDN
calls without Attendant assistance.
2. Operating Procedure
Operation is fully automatic in that restricted stations; will receive Reorder Tone upon attempting to place a
restricted call.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 75:
Should the following commands be developed for Day/
Night? 0/1:No/Yes.
Bit 0-Develop ARSC command for Day/Night?
Bit 3-Develop ATDP command for Day/Night?
System Data 2, Index 1, bits 4&5: Should a Toll-Restricted station be routed to the
Attendant Console or receive ReorderTone?
Reorder Tone: bit 4 = “0”, bit 5 = “0”.
Attendant Console: bit 4 = “0”, bit 5 = “0”.
ROUTE RESTRICTION CLASS
STEP 2: ARSC - Sixteen different Route Restriction Classes may be constructed to either allow, deny, or toll
restrict access to the various routes of the system. Assign the RSC using Route Restriction
Indexes 2 (outgoing via the Attendant Console) and 3 (Outgoing Direct).
STEP 3: ASDT - Assign Tenant No., Station No., LENs, and the Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) to the
station. This is used in regular Business systems. The Service Feature Class (SFC) and
Route Restriction Class (RSC) are also assigned to the telephone.
TN:
Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
LEN: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
TEC: Telephone class (1-31)
1 - DP (10pps)
2 - BP
3 - DP/PB
4 - DP (20pps)
term
12 - D
term
13 - Data terminal Via D
14 - Hot Line
15 - CAS Line
18 - Virtual Circuit
23 - ISDNTerminal
27 - 8 Conference Equipment
RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) For assignment of RSC, ARSC command.
SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) For assignment of SFC, ASFC command.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 135
Revision 1.0
SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-PRI
S-82
SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user or ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] to call frequently dialed ISDN numbers
using fewer digits (abbreviated call codes) than would normally be required.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Dial the Speed Calling access code (one to three digits).
2. Dial the abbreviated call code (maximum four digits).
3. The call is completed.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 7: Does TOLL RESTRICTION [T-7] apply to SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM? 0/1:Yes/No.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign Connection Indexes of Normal. Assign
NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assigning an access code to SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM, assign SRV = SSC, SID 15.
Program for normal. NND = Access code plus ADC (Abbreviated Digit Code). See ASPD.
Example: 6+010 (1 digit+3 digits) = NND = 4
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 12 to stations that will have SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM.
STEP 5: ASPD - Assign the Tenant Number, the Abbreviated Digit Code-ADC, and the CD-Telephone
Number to be sent. Include the access code of the route in the CD.
•
•
•
Each abbreviated call code can store a maximum of 24 digits, including access codes.
A maximum of 1,000 codes can be assigned per system.
Called party subaddress may by stored by MAT. For example:
9 - 1 - 212 - 556 - 1234 -*- 2222
Access Code
Called Party
Number
Delimiter
Called Party
Subaddress
CHAPTER 5
Page 136
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
term
SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-D
-PRI
term
S-82D SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-D
-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature allows a D
station user to call frequently dialed ISDN numbers using fewer digits (abbreviated
call codes) than would normally be required.
2. Operating Procedure
term
To operate (D ):
1. Press the SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM [S-3] (SPEED-SYS) feature key.
2. Dial the abbreviated call code (two or three digits). The LCD displays:
XXXX
(Time Display)
ABBREVIATED
CALL CODE
3. The Call is completed.
term
4. If the D
set does not have the SPEED CALLING SYSTEM [S-3] (SPEED-SYS) feature key, dial the
SPEED CALLING SYSTEM [S-3] access code.
To operate from a “ONE TOUCH-SPEED CALLING” key:
1. Press a “ONE TOUCH-SPEED CALLING” key, the LCD displays previously stored digits.
2. Dial the SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM [S-3] access code.
term
3. Press the SPEED CALLING-ONE TOUCH-D
[S-26D] key. The LCD will display:
term
term
[D
Series III]
D
Series E]
SPD SET
(Time Display)
SPEED SET
(Time Display)
term
4. To access, press the SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH-D
[S-26D] key.
The abbreviated Calling Code may be stored with the access code in the SPEED CALLING-ONE TOUCH-
term
D
[S-26D] key. Add a pause between access code and calling code.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 7: Does TOLL RESTRICTION [T-7] apply to SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM? 0/1: Yes/No.
STEP 2: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 12 to stations that will have SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 137
Revision 1.0
term
SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-D
-PRI
STEP 3: ASPD - Assign the Tenant Number, the Abbreviated Digit Code-ADC, and the CD-Telephone
Number to be sent. Include the access code of the route in the CD.
•
•
Each abbreviated call code can store a maximum of 24 digits, including access codes.
The following is the maximum number of Speed Calling numbers that can be stored in
the system:
1000calls/system
•
Called party subaddress may be stored by MAT. For example:
9 - 1 - 212 - 556 - 1234 -*- 2222
Access Code
Called Party
Number
Delimiter
Called Party
Subaddress
term
term
STEP 4: AKYD - Assign SPEED CALLING to D
key. Assign FKY 15 to the D
key.
CHAPTER 5
Page 138
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM-RS232C-PRI
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM-RS232C-PRI
1. General Description
S-83
This feature provides a “call record” for all outgoing station-to-PRI trunk calls and incoming PRI trunk-to-
station calls. When the system is equipped with this feature an RS232C output port is provided, permitting direct
interface with a customer-owned computer system. All output is in the ASCII format, and includes the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calling Station Number
Called Station Number (24 digits maximum)
Route Number
Start of Call Time
Disconnect Time
Year, Month and Date
Attendant Handled
ACCOUNT CODE [A-18]
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE [F-7] /AUTHORIZATION CODE [A-28]
AUTHORIZATION CODE-EPN [A-22] (8 digits maximum)
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 20, bit 7: Charging to a call transferred by CALL FORWARDING-
OUTSIDE
0=Charging is made to the caller of the transferred call.
1=Charging is made to the station which has set CALL
FORWARDING-OUTSIDE service.
Index 32, bit 1: 1=Record the tenant information
bit 2: 1=Record the route taken
bit 5: Is the Route Access code recorded? 0/1=No/Yes.
bit 6: Is the number sent or number dialed recorded in SMDR?
0/1=Number to be sent/Number to be dialed.
bit 7: 1=SMDR is in service
Index 33:
• Data 00 Hex=Split Billing
• When bit 5=1 (Total Billing for incoming calls)
and/or bit 6=1 (Total Billing for outgoing calls),
the following data can be assigned.
b4 b3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
= Telephone called first
= Telephone called last
= Next Telephone receiving call from ATT/Station.
= Last Telephone receiving call form ATT/Station.
Index 34, bit 0: 1=Enables RS-232C transmission.
bit 5: Is the converted number sent? 0/1=No/Yes.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 139
Revision 1.0
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM-RS232C-PRI
System Data 1, Indexes 288-295: Designation of the attributes of the SMDR.
SMDR output port will be designated. For this
designation, the attributes of the terminal which
outputs the detail call information should have been
designated by the AIOC command.
Also for detecting a fault of the SMDR, set the SMDR
fault detect timer.
Index 288 = Charging information port of SMDR A.
Index 289 = SMDR fault detect timer of SMDR A.
Index 290 = Charging information port of SMDR B.
Index 291 = SMDR fault detect timer of SMDR B.
Index 292 = Charging information port of SMDR C.
Index 293 = SMDR fault detect timer of SMDR C.
Index 294 = Charging information port of SMDR D.
Index 295 = SMDR fault detect timer of SMDR D.
System Data 2, Index 3, bit 0: 1=SMDR registration per tenant is valid.
bit 7: 0/1=-/SMDR Output (STN-STN) is in service.
STEP 2: AIOC - Assign the function and attribute data of the IOC ports.
STEP 3: ARTD - CDN 10. Enable outgoing routes to be included for SMDR registration. CDN 16,
Determination on a per-route basis what type of connection will be registered by SMDR.
For outgoing only routes, assign data “0”. For incoming routes, assign data “2”. For
bothway trunk routes, assign data “1” only.
CDN56. Detailed billing for outgoing (tandem). CDN69. Detailed billing for incoming
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 140
Revision 1.0
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM-RS232C-PRI
<Reference>
PBX A
PBX B
PBX C
RT1
RT2
Station A
Station C
NO SMDR
SMDR
SMDR
In the network shown above, PBX B functions as a tandem switch. In this example, parameters
SMDR3 and SMDR4 for RT1 of PBX B should be assigned as 1 for the following reasons.
When Station C places a call to Station A:
Since SMDR collects billing information on the outgoing trunk at PBX C, billing information
on the outgoing trunk of RT1 is not required at PBX B (SMDR3=1).
When Station A places a call to Station C:
At PBX B, SMDR collects billing information on the outgoing trunk of RT2, and therefore
billing information on the incoming trunk of RT1 is not required (SMDR4=1).
Figure 5-4 Example of SMDR Assignments
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign data “1” to SFI14 of a Service Feature Class whose traffic is to be registered on
SMDR (Trunk Basis). Assign data “1” to SFI58 of a Service Feature Class whose traffic is
to be registered on SMDR (STN to STN Basis).
STEP 5: ARNP - For the routes flagged for SMDR in ARTD, list the Physical route number and the LCR
access code.
STEP 6: AMND- Assign the number of digits the register is to receive for every dialing code. List the Toll
Number ID Data code for the system to distinguish the Toll Dialing patterns for SMDR
registration.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 141
Revision 1.0
SPEED CALLING-STATION-PRI
S-84
SPEED CALLING-STATION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to dial frequently called ISDN network numbers using fewer digits
(abbreviated call codes) than normally required. With this feature a station user can establish personal
abbreviated codes.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Dial the speed calling access code (one or two digits).
2. Dial the abbreviated call code (one or two digits).
3. Call is completed.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 3: Does TOLL RESTRICTION apply to SPEED
CALLING-STATION? 0/1: Yes/No. (If yes, refer to
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6 DIGIT [T-7]).
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N (Normal).
Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Two access codes must be assigned for this feature.
For the individual station speed calling number entry, assign the tenant and access code
(ACC). Assign for a Connection Index of Normal. For SRV = SSC, assign SID 14.
For individual station speed calling access, assign the tenant and access code (ACC).
Assign for a Connection Index of Normal. For SRV = SSC, assign SID 21.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 19 to the stations to receive SPEED
CALLING-STATION.
STEP 5: AISA - Program the tenant, station, type of station, and the number of SPEED CALLING blocks
to be assigned to the Master station.
TN:
STN:
Tenant Number
Station Number
MST/SLV: Master/Slave
M-Master Station
S-Slave Station
BLOCK: Number of Blocks
STN: When assigning Slave Station, assign the Master Station number.
STEP 6: AKYD - KYI = 1 FKY = 26 (SPEED CALLING-STATION)
STEP 7: AISD - This command is used to assign, delete and display the destination number of Individual
Speed Calling.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 142
Revision 1.0
SPEED CALLING-GROUP-PRI
S-85
SPEED CALLING-GROUP-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station user to share a group of common ISDN network Speed Calling numbers with other
members in the group.
2. Operating Procedure
To operate:
1. Dial the speed calling access code (one or two digits).
2. Dial the abbreviated call code (one or two digits).
3. Call is completed.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 3: Does TOLL RESTRICTION apply to SPEED
CALLING-STATION? 0/1: Yes/No. (If yes, refer to
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6 DIGIT [T-7]).
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N; Normal.
Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Two access codes must be assigned for this feature.
For the individual station speed calling number entry, assign the tenant and access code
(ACC). Assign for a Connection Index of Normal. For SRV = SSC, assign SID 14.
For individual station speed calling access, assign the tenant and access code (ACC).
Assign for a Connection Index of Normal. For SRV = SSC, assign SID 21.
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 19 to the stations to receive SPEED
CALLING-STATION.
STEP 5: AISA - Program the tenant, station, type of station, and the number of SPEED CALLING blocks
to be assigned to the Master station.
TN:
STN:
Tenant Number
Station Number
MST/SLV: Master/Slave
M-Master Station
S-Slave Station
BLOCK: Number of Blocks
STN:
When assigning Slave Station, assign the Master Station number.
STEP 6: AKYD - KYI = 1 FKY = 26 (SPEED CALLING-STATION)
STEP 7: AISD - This command is used to assign, delete and display the destination number of Individual
Speed Calling.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 143
Revision 1.0
SIMULTANEOUS VOICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION-PRI
S-86 SIMULTANEOUS VOICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature is provided by NEC’s proprietary digital D
family of terminal equipment. A 64 kbps digital
voice signal and a data signal of up to 56 kbps can be transmitted simultaneously over the same wire. Voice and
data calls can be placed to different locations via PRI.
2. Operating Procedure
To place a voice communication.
term
1. Go off-hook or press the D
’s “SPEAKER” key.
2. The Prime Line LED flashes and Dial Tone is received. If the “SPEAKER” key is used, the SPEAKER LED
will illuminate steadily.
3. Dial a voice extension of the distant PBX.
4. When the called party answers, voice communication can begin.
To initiate a data call while the voice communication is in progress:
1. While a voice communication is progress, user ‘A’ presses the “DTX” key.
term
2. On user A's D , the DTX LED illuminates, the DATA LED flashes and the LCD is displayed as
D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
3. When user 'B' answers, both parties ‘DATA LED’s illuminate steadily, both LCDs display:
term
term
for D
Series III or
for D
Series E, and data
RDY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
READY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
communication can begin.
4. The voice communication is not interrupted during this process. After five seconds, the voice call display
returns.
The “DISP/AUTO” key may be pressed to return the following displays
term
term
for D
Series III or
for D
Series E.
RDY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
READY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
To place a data call to a different location or while voice communication is not in progress:
term
1. Press the “DATA” key on the D
. The LED above the key will illuminate and “D” will appear on the LCD.
2. Use the keypad to dial the desired DTE extension.
will appear on the display.
D XXXX
(Time Display)
(“XXXX” refers to the called extension number).
3. The DATA LED will flash and,
D DTE XXXX
will appear (flashing) on the LCD.
(Time Display)
4. When the called DTE answers, the display is changed as follows:
term
term
for D
Series III or
for D
Series E
READY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
RDY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
5. Data communication can begin.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 144
Revision 1.0
SIMULTANEOUS VOICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION-PRI
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 16, bits 0-4: Place one - to five-digit station numbers in service.
STEP 2: ASDT - Assign Tenant No., Station No., LEN, and the Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) to the
station. Also, assign the Service Feature Class and Route Restriction Class.
TN:
Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
LEN: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
The LEN of the data extension is assigned as TEC 13. The voice LEN is assigned as a
TEC 12. The voice and data LENs are associated as follows:
VOICE
DATA
LEN xx
LEN xx
LEN xx
LEN xx
x
x
x
x
U
xx
xx
xx
xx
GP
0
LEN xx
LEN xx
LEN xx
LEN xx
x
x
x
x
U
xx
xx
xx
xx
GP
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
MG
LV
MG
LV
TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)
1- DP (10pps)
2 - PB
3 - DP/PB
term
---> 12 - D
term
---> 13 - Data Terminal via D
14 - Hotline
15 - CAS Line
18 - Virtual Circuit
(For Data Terminals, assign RSCs that allow access to the routes to be used for data
transmission, and the SFC of the data terminal should include SFI 11 = 0, Data Privacy.)
RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)
For assignment of RSC, ARSC command.
SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)
For Assignment of SFC, ASFC command.
STEP 3: ANPD - Reserve a number level for station access. Assign for normal and hooking. Assign NND in
accordance with a predetermined numbering plan. BLF is on.
STEP 4: ASPA - For a Connection Index as Normal and Hooking, assign the SRV = STN, assign Tenant
(TN).
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 145
Revision 1.0
SIMULTANEOUS VOICE AND DATA TRANSMISSION-PRI
STEP 5: AKYD - Assign the station according to the following parameters:
(The data extension number is automatically assigned to the key programmed asDATA.)
TN:
STN: Station Number
1
term
TP:
Type of D
KYN: Key Number
KYI: Service Index
0-Key Not Used
--> 1-Feature Key
2-Multi-line Key
KD: Not assigned for Feature Key
FKY: Function Key Number
---> FKY = 29, DATA
---> FKY = 30, AUTO (Optional)
---> FKY = 31, DTX
Note: See “Data Adapter Operation Manual” to refer the installation and SW settings.
See “Data Communication Command Guide” to refer Hayes/V25bis commands.
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 146
Revision 1.0
SYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING-PRI
S-87
SYNCHRONOUS DATA SWITCHING-PRI
1. General Description
term
A synchronous DTE connected to a D /Data Adapter can communicate via the PBX with a synchronous DTE
term
connected to a Synchronous D /Data Adapter.
2. Operating Procedure
term
To originate a data call from the sync./async. D /Data Adapter:
term
1. Press the “DATA” key on the D
. The LED above the key will illuminate and “D” will appear on the LCD.
2. Use the keypad to dial the desired DTE extension.
refers to the called extension number).
will appear on the display (“XXXX”
D XXXX
(Time Display)
3. The DATA LED will flash an
d
,will appear (flashing) on the LCD.
D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
4. When the called DTE answers, the display is changed as follows,
term
term
for D
Series III or
for D
Series E.
RDY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
READY D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
5. A transparent data path is established, and data communication can begin.
To terminate the data call, either user may press the “DATA” key. The other party’s LCD will display as shown
below for five seconds.
term
term
(D
Series III) or
(D
Series E).
RLS D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
RELEASE D DTE XXXX
(Time Display)
Both parties’ DATA and DTX LEDs will be extinguished.
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 147
Revision 1.0
SMDR FOR DATA CALL-RS232C-PRI
S-88
SMDR FOR DATA CALL-RS232C-PRI
1. General Description
This feature provides a call record of all outgoing station-to-trunk and incoming PRI trunk-to-station data calls.
When this feature is provided, an RS232C output port is utilized, permitting direct interface with a customer-
owned computer system. All output is in ASCII format and includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calling Station Number
Called Station Number (24 digits maximum)
Route Number
Start of Call Time
Disconnect Time
Year, Month and Date
Attendant Handled
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
CHAPTER 5
Page 148
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE-SYSTEM-PRI
S-89
SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE-SYSTEM-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows a station with restriction on outgoing ISDN and/or certain miscellaneous trunk calls by the
station CLASS OF SERVICE-INDIVIDUAL [C-15] to place such calls by using the prefixed digits
(abbreviated call code) registered beforehand in SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM-PRI [S-82]. A station may use
this feature if it has been assigned the appropriate SFC (Service Feature Class).
2. Operating Procedure
term
1. Lift the handset (includes “SPEAKER” key operation on D
2. Dial the speed calling access code (one or two digits).
3. Dial the abbreviated call code (two or three digits).
). Listen for Dial Tone.
4. If the station is allowed this call, the call is completed, if not, the station will hear Reorder Tone.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bit 6: Is SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE (on a SFC basis) to
be enabled? 0/1: No/Yes.
bit 7: Is SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE (on a system basis)
to be enable? 0/1 = No/Yes.
Note: Assign the data “1” in either bit 6 or bit 7.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign for Normal. Assign NND in accordance
with a predetermined numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assigning an access code to SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM, assign SRV = SSC, SID = 15.
Program for Normal. NND = Access code plus ADC (Abbreviated Digit Code). See ASPD.
Example: 6 (ACC) + 010 (ADC)
1 digit + 3digits = NND = 4
STEP 4: ASFC - Assign a Service Feature Class that allows SFI 12 to stations that will have SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM.
STEP 5: ASPD - Assign the Tenant Number, the Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC), and the CD-Telephone
Number to be sent. Include the access code of the route in the CD.
STEP 6: AABD - Assign the Tenant (TN); and the Abbreviated Speed Calling Code, (ADC); as assigned in
the ASPD command. Assign the Service Feature Class (SFC) and Restriction Data (RES).
RES 0: Connection is restricted.
RES 1: Connection is allowed.
Note: This step can be skipped when System Data 2, Index 1, bit 6=0 in ASYD.
STEP 7: AKYD - Assign SPEED CALLING-SYSTEM to a programmable Line/Feature key. Assign KYI =
1 and FKI = 15.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 149
Revision 1.0
STATION INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS-PRI
S-107 STATION INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS-PRI
1. General Description
This feature permits a station to access an individual ISDN trunk via dial access.
2. Operating Procedure
To access:
1. Lift the handset; receive the Dial Tone
2. Dial the feature access code, trunk route number, trunk number, and desired station number; receive the
Ringback Tone.
3. When the called party answers, communication can begin.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 68, bit 1: Designates the method the Attendant Console must use to
operate INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS. 0/1: Route &
Trunk Number/Listed Directory Number (Central Office
Code, ACOC)
System Data 1, Index 68, bit 4: Is Trunk Select Key in service? 0/1: No/Yes. Assign data
1.
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for this access code. CI=N.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code for this service. CI=Normal, SRV=SSC, SID=17.
Optional
STEP 4: ARTD - If the Central Office Code option is assigned, assign data “1” in CDN 25.
STEP 5: ACOC - If the Central Office Code option is assigned, trunks in the system must be programmed to
have an associated Central Office Code. This code is dialed after pressing the Attendant
Console’s Trunk Select key.
STEP 6: ASFC - Allow the restriction. SFI39=1.
CHAPTER 5
Page 150
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIETRUNKS-2/4-WIRE-PRI
TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIE TRUNKS-2/4-WIRE-PRI
1. General Description
T-37
This feature allows PRI trunk-to-Tie-trunk connections through the PBX without the need for any Attendant
assistance or control. The major use of this feature is in association with the Dial Tandem Tie Line Network to
allow Tie line connections and incoming Tie line calls automatic access to and completion of local central office
calls.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset; receive Dial Tone from the distant office.
2. Dial the Tie Trunk access code; receive DialTone from the PBX.
3. Dial “9”; receive Dial Tone from the distant PBX or local Central Office.
4. Dial the Central Office exchange number (local or toll).
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARTD - Assign the TIE Line routes as shown below:
<Example of BOTHWAY TIE-LINES>
RT : 1
1-OSGS
6-TCL
: 2 2-ONSG
: 4 7-L/T
: 3 3-ISGS
: 1 8-RLP
: 2 4-INSG
: 2 15-LSG
: 3 5-TF
: 3
: 1
: 4 28-ANS
The other data than above should be set “0” (default data).
STEP 2: ATRK - Assign the LENs, TIE Line Route Number, Trunk Number, and Tenant Number.
STEP 3: MBTK - Assign the Make Idle status to the TIE Line Trunks.
STEP 4: ANPD - Reserve a number level for trunk access. Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N, H; Normal
and Hooking (hookswitch). Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined numbering
plan. Busy Lamp Field is not activated.
STEP 5: ASPA - Assign the access code as assigned in ANPD above. Assign Connection Indexes, CI = N,
H; Normal and Hooking (hookswitch). Type of Service, SRV = OGC, Outgoing Trunk.
Assign the route number associated with this access code.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 151
Revision 1.0
TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIETRUNKS-2/4-WIRE-PRI
STEP 6: ARRC - Assign to the system trunk-to-trunk connection. Use Alternative Route Index (ARI) D for
Direct Connection. Three possible Restrictions (RES) may be assigned; data “0”,
Connection is Restricted; data “1”, Connection is Allowed; or data “2”, Toll Restriction is
required. For TANDEM SWITCHING OF TIE TRUNKS-2/4 WIRE, TOLL
RESTRICTION is not required.
STEP 7: APAD - Assign any Pad data that may be required for desired quality of service. (Optional, see TIE
LINE CONNECTION WITH PAD CONTROL [T-5]).
Note: In the network including CCIS No.7, assign data CDN98 (CI)=1 (of the ARTD command) to all speech
routes of CCIS No.7 network.
Refer to [T-44] TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM).
CHAPTER 5
Page 152
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
THREE-WAY CALLING-PRI
T-38
THREE-WAY CALLING-PRI
1. General Description
This feature enables any station user to add another party to an existing ISDN network connection, establishing
a Three-Way conference.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Place the original party on hold.
2. Press the hookswitch; receive Special Dial Tone.
3. Dial the desired number; receive an answer.
4. Announce the conference and press hookswitch again.
5. THREE-WAY CALLING-PRI is now established.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 2, Index 1, bits 0 & 1: Consultation Hold allowed or denied. 00: Denied;
01: Originating and Terminating Calls allowed,
Tandem Call Denied; 10: Only Terminating Calls
Allowed; 11: All calls allowed.
Index 6, bit 2: This bit remains as data “0”. CALL TRANSFER-ALL
CALLS [C-11].
bit 3: Enable add-on ability. This bit remains as data “0” to
allow THREE-WAY CALLING.
System Data 3, Index 2: Assign data 91H for Normal, hookswitch (Hooking) values.
STEP 2: ATRK - Assign these LENs as Route 909, Digital Conference Trunk. The LEN consists of the
following:
XX
Module
Group
X
Unit
XX
Group
X
Level
Group and Level numbers for the Digital Conference Trunk are 210, 213, 216, 221, 224,
227, 232 and 235.
STEP 3: MBTK - Make idle the Digital Conference Trunk.
STEP 4: ARRC - Allow for trunk-to-trunk connections between any two routes that may be used in THREE-
WAY CALLING. Assign these routes for ARI = A: This connection is for a station and two
trunks.
ARI = D: If the originating party hangs up, the remaining two parties will stay connected.
STEP 5: ARSC - The Route Restriction Class must be constructed so as to allow the station access to the
involved routes.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 153
Revision 1.0
term
THREE-WAY CALLING-D
-PRI
term
T-38D THREE-WAY CALLING-D
-PRI
1. General Description
term
This feature enables a D
station user to establish a Three-Way conference by connecting an additional party
to an already existing conversation.
2. Operating Procedure
term
To operate a D
:
1. Press the “TRANSFER” key; receive Special Dial Tone; the original party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the desired number; receive an answer.
3. Announce the conference and press the “CONF” key.
term
4. THREE-WAY CALLING-D
-PRI is now established. The LCD displays:
term
term
[D
Series III]
[D
Series E]
CNF
CONF
(Time Display)
(Time Display)
3. Programming
CHAPTER 5
NDA-24305
Page 154
Revision 1.0
TOLL DENIAL/TOLL DIVERSION-PRI
T-40
TOLL DENIAL/TOLL DIVERSION-PRI
1. General Description
This feature prohibits station users from placing long distance calls over specific ISDN network trunks.
Restricted calls are routed to either an ATTENDANT CONSOLE [A-3] (diversion) or to an Reorder Tone
(denial).
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 75:
Should the following commands be developed for
Day/Night: 0/1: No/Yes. See DAY/NIGHT
CLASS OF SERVICE [D-15] for details.
-Bit 0- Develop ARSC command for Day/Night?
-Bit 3- Develop ATDP command for Day/Night?
System Data 2, Index 1, bits 4 & 5: If TOLL DENIAL is required, assign these bits
as data “00”. If TOLL DIVERSION is required,
assign these bits as “01”. Calls are then diverted
to the Attendant Console. Assigned on a per-
tenant basis.
STEP 2: ARSC - Assign Route Restriction Classes. When these are assigned to stations, classes will
determine whether or not a station will be allowed access to a specific route or specific
dialing sequence. See TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6 DIGIT [T-7]. Assign the following:
DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
TN:
RT:
Tenant Number
Route Number
RSC: Route Restriction Class
RRI: Route Restriction Index
0-IC Restriction via Attendant Console/station
1-IC Restriction Direct Connection
2-OG Restriction via Attendant Console/station
3-OG Restriction Direct Connection
RES: Restriction Data
0-Connection is Restricted
1-Connection is Allowed
2-Connection is Toll Restricted (See “TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6-DIGIT”, [T-7])
STEP 3: ASDT - When assigning the data to specific stations, assign the proper RSC to each station.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 155
Revision 1.0
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
T-41
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows the system to be programmed to restrict outgoing ISDN calls according to specific area and/
or Central Office codes.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 75:
Should the following commands be developed for Day/
Night? 0/1: No/Yes. See DAY/NIGHT CLASS OF
SERVICE [D-15] for more details.
-Bit 0- Develop ARSC command for Day/Night?
-Bit 3- Develop ATDP command for Day/Night?
System Data 2, Index 1, bit 3: Does TOLL RESTRICTION apply to SPEED
CALLING-STATION [S-21]? 0/1: Yes/No.
bits 4 & 5: If TOLL DENIAL is required, assign these bits as data
“00”. If TOLL DIVERSION is required, assign these bits
as “01”.
bit 7: Does TOLL RESTRICTION apply to SPEED
CALLING-SYSTEM [S-3]? 0/1: Yes/No.
STEP 2: ARSC - Assign Route Restriction Classes. When these are assigned to stations, classes will
determine whether or not a station will be allowed access to a specific route or specific
dialing sequence. Assign the following:
DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
TN:
RT:
Tenant Number
Route Number
RSC: Route Restriction Class
RRI: Route Restriction Index
0-IC Restriction via Attendant Console/station
1-IC Restriction Direct Connection
2-OG Restriction via Attendant Console/station
3-OG Restriction Direct Connection
RES: Restriction Data
0-Connection is Restricted
1-Connection is Allowed
2-Connection is Toll Restricted
CHAPTER 5
Page 156
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
TOLL RESTRICTION-3/6-DIGIT-PRI
STEP 3: AMND- This command indicates the total number of digits to expect, based upon the first digits
dialed. A “9” plus a local call will equal 8 digits, “9” plus 1 plus an Area Code call will
equal 12 digits. Assign the dialed digits information and the corresponding Maximum
Necessary Digits (MND) data. Flag this data as a Toll Call; data “1”, or a local call; data “0”
1 + DIALING
(N = 2-9, P = 0 or 1, A/X = 0-9)
CALL TYPE
DIGITS DIALED
DIGITS NEEDED
MND
TOLL
Local Calls
9-NNX-XXXX
9-1-NNX-XXXX
9-N
8
9
0
1
1
Near Distance Calls
Long Distance Calls
9-1-NN
9-1-NP
9-1-NPA-NXX-XXXX
12
WITHOUT 1 + DIALING
(N = 2-9, P = 0 or 1, A/X = 0-9)
CALL TYPE
DIGITS DIALED
DIGITS NEEDED
MND
TOLL
Local Calls
9-NNX-XXXX
9-N
8
0
1
Long Distance Calls
9-NPA-NXX-XXXX
9-NP
11
Note: The digits underlined are to be listed in the DC (Digit Code) parameter.
Overseas or Operator-assisted calls should be listed with an MND equal to the calculated number of
required digits.
Special dialing sequences such as “911” with an MND = 4 should also be listed.
STEP 4: ATDP - Assign the following:
DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
TDM/OG: Tandem Connection/Outgoing Connection
T: Tandem Connection
O: Outgoing Connection
ICRT: Incoming Route Number (Tandem Connection Only)
RSC: Restriction Class (0-15)
OGRT: Outgoing Route Number
DC:
TDI: Restriction Data
0: Connection is Restricted
Destination (Area) Code (Maximum 11 digits)
1: Connection is Allowed
2: 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
3: C.O. Operator Call (9+0)
NND: Necessary Digits (1-12)
This parameter is available only when TDI=2 ( 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 157
Revision 1.0
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)-PRI
U-6 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)-PRI
1. General Description
This feature distributes incoming calls from ISDN trunk to a specified group. Calls are distributed to idle
stations, in a circular pattern, in the order they arrive.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASHU - Assign the required data for the UCD group:
TN:
Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
CNT: Number of stations to be entered (Recommended Max. of 20 stations for the
release 1/2, Max. of 100 stations for the release 3 or higher)
STN: Station Numbers of the stations included in the UCD group.
(The order in which stations are programmed is the order in which they will be
hunted.)
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for feature access. Assign Connection Indexes of Normal and
momentary switchhook flash (Hooking). Assign NND in accordance with a predetermined
numbering plan.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign an access code to UCD BUSY OUT. SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 50 BUSY OUT set,
SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 51 BUSY OUT cancel. Connection Status Indexes CI = N, Normal
and CI = H, hooking.
STEP 4: AKYD - Assign BUSY OUT set/cancel key (same key does both; toggles function on/off). Assign
KYI = 1, FKY = 19. Assign UCD Call Waiting Indication key. Assign KYI-1, FKY-47.
STEP 5: ATRF - Assign Traffic Measurement Order.
TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement (1-16)
INTERVAL: Output Interval must be assigned in units of ten minutes (range is from 30-
120 minutes), or data “0” must be assigned, which is the instruction for
assigning output time.
FROM-TO-: Measurement time is to be designated.
TIME: Output Time
TYPE: 1-10
1: Terminal Traffic Measurement
2: Route Traffic Measurement
3: Station Peg Count
4: Attendant Console Peg Count
5: Route Peg Count
6: Service Peg Count
7: Terminal Peg Count
8: UCD Route Peg Count
9: UCD Group Peg Count
10: UCD Station Peg Count
CHAPTER 5
Page 158
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)-PRI
STEP 6: DTF3 - Display of Traffic Data 3
TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement
8: UCD Route Peg Count
9: UCD Group Peg Count
10: UCD Station Peg Count
Note: STEP 5 and STEP 6 are necessary only for measuring the UCD Traffic.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 5
Page 159
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 5
Page 160
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 6
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This chapter explains the data assignment of ISDN station and supplementary services of ISDN.
Contents of this section are as follows. Refer to “ISDN Features and Specifications” for availability of each
Supplementary Service on Fusion Network.
Table 6-1 ISDN Station
CONTENTS
Data Assignment of ISDN station
(1) ISDN Terminal (5ESS)
(2) ISDN Terminal (National ISDN1)
(3) PRI station (H0)
(4) PRI station (H11)
Table 6-2 Supplementary Service List
SERVICE
TYPE
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE FEATURE
Calling Party Recognition Service
Service for IC call
(Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/Don’t Answer)
Calling Party Recognition Service
[Direct-In-Termination (DIT)]
Call Redirection (for AT&T #4ESS)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Addressing
SID to Terminating User-Display
SID to Terminating User (Call-by-Call)-Display forAT&T (#4ESS)
SID to Terminating User-DTE
Sub Address-Addressing
Service for OG call
ACCUNET Access154
B-Channel Service Control
Call-by-Call Pool Management
Call-by-Call Service Selection
CCIS Tandem Call-Calling Party Number (CPN) Delivery to ISDN &
D-Channel Backup-PRI
MEGACOM Access
MEGACOM 800 Service
Non-Facility Associated Signaling-PRI
Q-SIG/ISDN International Gateway Switching Note 5
SDN Access
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 161
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
Table 6-2 Supplementary Service List
SERVICE
TYPE
FEATURE
CODE
SERVICE FEATURE
Service for OG call
Sub Address-Present
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
Wide Band Switching for AT&T #4ESS
Transfer Message (TRM)
National-ISDN2-PRI
Network Name Display (NI-2 PRI) Note 5
Virtual Tie Line
Special Network
Private Network
Event Based CCIS-ISDN Transport
Call Completion on No Reply (CCNR) Note 3
Call Completion to a Busy Subscriber (CCBS) Note 3
Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)/
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP) Note 4
Call Forwarding Supplementary Service (SS-CF) with Rerouting Note 5
Call Transfer Supplementary Service (SS-CT) with Rerouting Note 5
IS-11572 (Layer 3 specifications for inter-PBX signalling protocol)
Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call-ETSI Version
Supplement
Advice of Charge (AOC)-Receipt and Display ofAOC from a Foreign
Note 1: Available since Series 7400 (Release 9) software.
Note 2: Available since Series 7300 (Release 4) software.
Note 3: Available for Q-SIG network since the Series 7300 (Release 2) software and for IS-11572 network since
the Series 7400 (Release 8) software.
Note 4: Available for Q-SIG network since the Series 7300 (Release 2) software and for IS-11572 network since
the Series 7300 (Release 7.5) software.
Note 5: Available since Series 7400 (Release 8) software.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 162
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
1. ISDN TERMINAL (5 ESS)
ILC
ISDN Term.
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the protocol type of ISDN Terminal.
SYS 1 Index 220 bit 0-bit 3: 1 (5 ESS)
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for a station number.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign Access Code for a station.
STEP 4: ASDT - Assign a station number to B1 and B2 channel.
TEC:23 (ISDN Terminal)
2. ISDN TERMINAL (NATIONAL ISDN1)
ILC
N-ISDN1
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the protocol type of ISDN terminal.
SYS 1 Index 220 bit 0-bit 3=5 (N-ISDN)
STEP 2: ANPD - Reserve a number level for a station number.
STEP 3: ASPA - Assign Access Code for a station.
STEP 4: ASDT - Assign a station number to B1 and B2 channel.
TEC: 23 (ISDN terminal)
FUNC:
TN:
1 (Terminal Data)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 163
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
STN:
TYPE:
FIDP:
1 (N-ISDN1)
1-31 (FID Pattern)
FUNC:
FIDP:
2 (Feature Identifier Data)
1-31 (FID Pattern)
Note 1: A PBX may send EPID (Endpoint Identification), for the terminal initialization, by receiving SPID
(Service Profile Identification) from N-ISDN terminal, and may perform the supplementary service
(Transfer) by FID (Feature Identifier) which has been set to each terminal.
Note 2: If you assign (AITD) data to B2 channel, this feature will not work.
Note 3: Assign “FID number” (Maximum two digits).
Terminal Initial
(1) INFO including SPID
ILC
(2) INFO including EPID
N-ISDN1
(1) A PBX receives INFO including SPID which was set by the terminal.
SPID allows the user to be executed an automatic allocation by USID (User Service Identifier) and TID
(Terminal Identifier).
2. After creating EPID, the PBX sends INFO including EPID.
EPID including USID and TID is necessary for the identification of the terminal.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 164
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
3. PRI STATION (H0)
23B+D
PRT
H0
Bch:RT15
Dch:RT16
STEP 1: Assign the numbering (LCR) data to access to H0 terminal.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the same route data as the data for Chapter 3, and arrange the following specific data
to Bch and Dch route.
CDN64 (NET)=
CDN65 (INT)=
CDN66 (DC)=
CDN118(BOB)=
1
5 (AT&T)/7 (NT)
15
1
STEP 3: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Bch. Note that the data setting for Dch is performed after STEP
STEP 4: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) to Bch route and Dch route. (Refer to the following example)
RT=15 (Bch) PC=11
RT=16 (Dch) PC=11
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 165
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
STEP 5: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch handler) and Bch. (Refer to the following example)
CSCG
CSCG=132
CICG
DCH/CCH
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24
P
R
T
PIM0
Dch
09 11
08 10
Group
No.
CSCG=133
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
00008
0008
Bch
STEP 6: ACIC1 - Assign CSCG corresponding to PC (Point Code). (Refer to the following example)
PC=11 CSCG=132
STEP 7: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Dch.
STEP 8: ARTI - Assign the Trunk Application data.
If the H0 terminal does not provide the initial setup procedure conforming to Q931 protocol, assign the
following data.
CDN 2 (RST)=3
Assignment of Restart
0: Restart Send per Individual Channel
1: –
2: –
3: Restart not Send
Note: Circuit Card must be initialized after these assignment.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 166
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
4. PRI STATION (H11)
Bch:RT10
Dch:RT12
2B+D
24B
ILC
Note
H11
PRT
Bch:RT11
Note: PA-ILCG is necessary for H11 (2B+D).
STEP 1: Assign the numbering (LCR) data to access to H11 terminal.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the same route data as the data for Chapter 3, and arrange the following specific data
to Bch and Dch route.
CDN64 (NET)= 1
CDN65 (INT)= 5 (AT & T)/7 (NT)
CDN66 (DC)= 15
CDN96 (H1)=
1
CDN118 (BOB)= 1
Note: Give the separate RT NO. to Bch of PRT and ILC respectively.
STEP 3: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Bch referring to the example below. Note that the trunk data for
Dch is assigned after Step 6: ACIC1 command assignment.
LENS
I
24
P
R
T
L
C
G
ILCG (2B+D) B1 =000030 RT10 TK1
B2 =000031 RT10 TK2
PIM0
Dch =000020 RT12 TK1
PRT (24B)
B1 =000050 RT11 TK1
B24 =000077 RT11 TK24
Group 03 05 07
No.
02 04 06
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 167
Revision 1.0
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
STEP 4: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) to Bch route and Dch route. (Refer to the following example)
RT=10 (Bch)
RT=11 (Bch)
RT=12 (Dch)
PC=10
PC=10
PC=10
STEP 5: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch handler) and Bch. (Refer to the following example)
CSCG
CSCG=130
CICG
DCH/CCH
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
00002
I
24
P
R
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
C
G
PIM0
Dch (ILCG)
03 05 07
02 04 06
Group
No.
CSCG=131
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00003
00004
00003
00003
00003
00003
00003
00003
Bch (ILCG)
Bch (PRT)
Bch (ILCG)
STEP 6: ACIC1 - Assign CSCG corresponding to PC (Point Code). (Refer to the following example)
PC=10 CSCG=130
STEP 7: ATRK - Assign the Trunk data for Dch.
If the H11 terminal does not provide the initial setup procedure conforming to Q931
protocol, assign the following data.
CDN 2 (RST)=3
Assignment of Restart
0: Restart Send per Individual Channel
1: –
2: –
3: Restart not Send
Note: Circuit Card must be initialized after this assignment.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 168
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE (CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER)
C-103 CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE
(CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER)
1. General Description
This feature enables the PBX to transfer a direct incoming call from the ISDN network, when the called party
has been set CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER, to the designated
destination by identifying the calling subscriber number. For this feature, the calling subscriber number and the
term
transfer destination must be assigned in advance. This feature is available for the analog station, D
terminal.
and ISDN
Note: The available CALL FORWARDING types are: CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/
DON’T ANSWER. The CALL FORWARDING destination can be determined according to the BC
(Bearer Capability).
Speech
3.1 kHz audio
Bearer Capability
• Unrestricted Digital Data is not available.
2. Operating Procedure
To set/cancel CALL FORWARDING from a station.
1. Lift a handset.
2. The station receives DT (Dial Tone).
3. Dial the access code of CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER.
4. The station receives SPDT (Special Dial Tone).
5. Dial its own station number.
6. The station receives SST (Service Set Tone).
To set/cancel CALL FORWARDING from an ATT console.
1. Press a loop key on the console.
2. Enter the CALL FORWARDING access code.
3. Enter the tenant number of the station.
4. Enter the transferring station number.
5. Enter the transferring station number again.
6. Press the Release key.
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 76, bit 0: Day/Night Table Development for CALLING PARTY
RECOGNITION SERVICE.
0: Not Required (Common)
1: Required (Separate)
STEP 3: ANPD - Assign the minimum necessary number of digits for the first number of the access code for
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 169
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE (CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER)
STEP 4: ASPA - Assign an access code for CALL FORWARDING.
CI: Common Status Index (N)
SRV: Kind of Service (Type in SSC)
SID: Service Feature Index
8-
9-
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS (ENTRY)
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS (CANCEL)
10- CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE (ENTRY)
11- CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE (CANCEL)
12- CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER (ENTRY)
13- CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER (CANCEL)
STEP 5: ACNP - Assign Calling Party Number Pattern Information
OG-IG: Outgoing/Incoming (Type in I = Incoming)
RT: Route Number
CNP: Calling Number Pattern (1~255)
STEP 6: ACND - Assign the Digit Code of the Additional Number.
CNP: Calling Number Pattern (1~255)
Enter the same value which has been assigned in the ACNP command.
SKIP: Skip Digit (0~24)-Number of digits for SID.
ADD: Number of Digits of the Additional Number (0~24)
Enter the number of digits (Number of digits for an access code to PRI) of the next
parameter (= DC).
DC: Digit Code of the Additional Number (0~24)
Enter the access code which is used to initiate seizure of the ISDN trunk.
STEP 7: AFCP - Assign the Call Forwarding Destination. (For More information, see the example on the
next page).
Calling Party Number
CFSI: CALL FORWARDING Service Feature (0~3)
0-CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
1-CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE
2-CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER
3-DIRECT-IN TERMINATION
ITC: Information Transfer Capacity (0~2)
0-Speech
1-Unrestricted (Digital Data) Note 3
2-Audio (Modem)
CFD: Call Forwarding Destination (0~3)
0-Station
1-ATT
2-External
3-Not used
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 170
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE (CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER)
STEP 8: ASFC - Enter Service Feature Restriction Data
SFI:
Service Feature Index (1~127)
7-CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS
8-CALL FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER
9-CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE
RES: Restriction Data 0/1 = Restricted/Allowed.
STEP 9: ATNR - Enter Tenant Restriction Data between the transferring station and the transferred station.
TRI: Tenant Restriction Index (0~15)
1-Assignment of CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS from a station
RES: Restriction Data 0/1 = Restricted/Allowed.
Note 1: Assign Called Station Number by the physical station number. PCS terminal’s number cannot be
assigned here.
Note 2: Enter the Access Code assigned in the ACND command (DC).
Note 3: This data (=1) can be assigned when the CFSI is DIT (=3).
Note 4: This parameter appears when the input data in the CFD is 0.
Note 5: This parameter appears when the input data in the CFD is 2.
Example:
AFCP
TN:
DAY/NIGHT: D
1
CALLING PARTY 3511 + ACC 0471-82-4212
CFSI: 1
SID
ITC:
0
0
CFD:
STN: 3611
PBX
ICT
C
I
S
D
N
3611
3511
B
A
(BUSY)
SID: 0471-82-4212
* In this example, this feature is executed as follows: When the calling subscriber places call to station B, his/
her call will be transferred to station C if station B is BUSY.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 171
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE [DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)]
C-104 CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE [DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)]
1. General Description
An Incoming Call from the ISDN network can be connected to the specific station, which can be assigned as a
destination in advance, on a calling subscriber number basis without any assistance of an operator.
This feature is automatically executed when no information has been received from the calling subscriber for
addressing a specific terminal in the PBX.
Note: The destination can be determined according to the BC (Bearer Capability).
term
This feature is available for the analog station, D
and ISDN terminal
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required once feature has been programmed.
3. Programming
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 76, b2: Day/Night Table Development for Call Forwarding
Service by Calling Number Data
0: Not required (Common)
1: Required (Separate)
STEP 3: ACOC - Assign the Central Office Code
RT:
TK:
DC:
Route Number
Trunk Number
Digit Code (4 digits)
STEP 4: ACNP - Assign the Calling Number Pattern (CNP)
OG/IC:
RT:
Outgoing/Incoming (Enter = Incoming)
Route Number
CNP:
Calling Number Pattern (1~255)
STEP 5: ACND - Assign the Digit Code of the Additional Number
CNP: Calling Number Pattern (1~255)
Enter same value which has been assigned in the ACNP command.
SKIP: Skip Digit (0~24)-Number of digits for SID.
ADD: Number of Digits of the Additional Number (0~24)
Enter the number of digits (Number of digits for an access code to PRI) of the next
parameter (=DC).
DC:
Digit Code of the Additional Number (0~24)
Enter the access code which is used to initiate seizure of the ISDN trunk.
CHAPTER 6
Page 172
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE [DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)]
STEP 6: AFCP - Assign the transfer destination.
DAY/NIGHT: Day mode/Night mode
TN:
TENANT NUMBER
Calling Party Number
CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature (0~3)
0-CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS
1-CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE
2-CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER
→
3-DIRECT-IN TERMINATION
ITC: Information Transfer Capacity (0~2)
0-Speech
1-Unrestricted (Digital Data) Note 3
2-Audio (Modem)
CFD: Call Forwarding Destination (0~3)
0-Speech
1-ATT
2-External
3-Not used
Note 1: Assign Called Station Number by the physical station number PCS terminal’s number cannot be
assigned here.
Note 2: Enter the Access Code assigned in the ACND command (DC).
Note 3: This data (=1) can be assigned when the CFSI is DTI (=3).
Note 4: This parameter appears when the input data in the CFD is 0.
Note 5: This parameter appears when the input data in the CFD is 2.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 173
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE [DIRECT-IN TERMINATION (DIT)]
Example:
AFCP DAY/NIGHT: D
TN:
1
CALLING PARTY 2222 + ACC 0471272991
CFSI: 3
COC Number
SID
CFD:
0
STN: 3501
PBX
0471272991
3500
ICT
I
S
D
N
COC Number: 2222
3501
3502
3503
Calling Subscriber: 0471-27-2991
* In this example, this feature is executed as follows: When a particular trunk (COC No. = 2222) receives an
incoming call from the ISDN network with a specific number (0471-27-2991, in the above case), the call
will be transferred to extension “3501”.
Figure 6-1 AssigningTransfer Destination
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 174
Revision 1.0
CALL REDIRECTION (FOR AT&T #4ESS)
C-170 CALL REDIRECTION (FOR AT&T #4ESS)
1. General Description
ISDN (AT&T-#4ESS) enables the call to a busy station in a PBX to transfer (FC TRANSFER) to a
predetermined destination in its network.
In CALL REDIRECTION, a PBX has to send RELCOM message including “user busy” or “resource
unavailable” (Cause) information.
Note 1: Whether this service is available or not depends on ISDN service provider and needs to be provisioned
on a contract with a network for ISDN line.
1 IC call
#4ESS
AT&T
PRT
2 RELCOM (user busy)
Busy
3 Transfer
(FC TRANSFER)
Busy
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 175
Revision 1.0
DID ADDRESSING
D-123 DID ADDRESSING
1. General Description
This feature provides for a called-party number received via ISDN to be used to designate the station at which
the call is to terminate.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
1. When the called party number and terminating station number are the same.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the number of digits of the called line to the parameter DC (CDN 66) of the routes
of the B-channel and D-channel of the 24 PRT which interfaces with the ISDN line with
DID Addressing.
Note: Specify “DC” on a route basis.
Example of Office Data Assignment for DID Line (No Digit Conversion)
CALLED PARTY
TERMINATING STATION No.
DC
REMARKS
NUMBER
438-3000
438-3001
438-3100
438-3101
3000
3001
100
When the number of digits for
the station number is 4.
4
When the number of digits for
the station number is 3.
3
101
PBX
DID NO. 438-3000
DC = 4
STN: 3000
STN: 100
ISDN
CALLING PARTY
DID NO. 438-3100
DC =3
2. When the called party number and terminating station number are different (Number Conversion).
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 176
Revision 1.0
DID ADDRESSING
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the number of digits to be decoded in the System to the parameter DC (CDN=66)
of the Route of the B-channels and D-channel of a 24PRT which interfaces with the ISDN
line with DID addressing.
Note: Specify “DC” on a route basis.
STEP 3: ACDD - Assign a Conversion Number for the Route of the B-channels in which the number of
decoding digits has been assigned with the ARTD command.
•
•
Assign “0” to the parameter “AD”.
If there are no attendant consoles in the system, set the DAY/NIGHT parameter to “N”
(Night Mode). The system functions as if in Night Mode.
Example of Office Data Assignment for DID Line (Digit Conversion)
ARTD
DC
ACDD
CALLED PARTY
NUMBER
TERMINATING
STATION NO.
REMARKS
DC
CDC
438-3000
438-3001
438-3100
438-3101
438-3200
4000
4001
220
4
4
3
3
4
3000
3001
100
4000
4001
220
See Example 1
See Example 2
See Example 3
221
101
221
5150
3200
5150
<Example 1>
PBX
PBX
PBX
DID NO. 438-3000/3001
DID NO. 438-3100/3101
DID NO. 438-3200
CALLING PARTY
CALLING PARTY
CALLING PARTY
ISDN
4000/4001
<Example 2>
ISDN
220/221
<Example 3>
ISDN
5150
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 177
Revision 1.0
NETWORK NAME DISPLAY (NI-2 PRI)
N-47
NETWORK NAME DISPLAY (NI-2 PRI)
1. General Description
This feature provides the Name Display service between NEAX2400 IPX system and National-ISDN 2 network
(NI-2 network or NI-2).
Note: Name Display service supports the followings.
(a) When the call is terminated directly from NI-2 network, it displays the received Calling Name
term
information on the D
/PS.
(b) When the call from NI-2 network is terminated via tandem connection, it transmits the received
Calling Name information through an intermediate network and displays the information on the
term
destination D
/PS.
This service is realized in the following case or network. See the illustration below.
term
Calling Name information received from NI-2 network is displayed on the D
connected directly or the system connected via tandem connection.
or PS terminal in the system
Office A
Office B
Office C
to NI-2 network
CCIS / Q-SIG
FCCS
NEC
NEC
NEC
National-
ISDN 2
Dterm
A
Dterm
B
ZT B
ZT A
Carrity
Carrity
CCIS /
Q-sig
PS B
PS A
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
*
*
NEC
Office D
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 178
Revision 1.0
NETWORK NAME DISPLAY (NI-2 PRI)
3. Service Conditions
1. This feature is available since Series 7400 Release 9 software.
2. This feature is available on condition that the system data is assigned to allow OAI service (see
PROGRAMMING).
3. This feature is not provided for Calling Name information transmission to NI-2 network.
term
4. Calling Name information received from NI-2 network can be displayed on D
or PS terminal only.
5. A maximum of 15 digits of Calling Name information received from NI-2 network is included in the facility
information element. The number of digits may depend on the system data assignment (see
6. The system does not check the contents of Calling Name information received from NI-2 network.
7. (The system displays or transmits Calling Name information as received from NI-2 network.)
8. When the Calling Name information received from NI-2 network is the information of intermediate party
(when NI-2 is the intermediate interface of the tandem connection), the information is not displayed on the
terminal nor transmitted to the destination.
9. When the destination sets the call forwarding service, the Calling Name information is also transmitted
(forwarded) to the forwarded destination (This condition is applied to both cases the forwarded destination
is in the same network and in other networks such as CCIS or Q-SIG, FCCS).
10. Calling Name information received as FACILITY message is not transmitted to CCIS or Q-SIG line (Calling
Name information in SETUP message only).
11. When the Calling Name information is not sent from NI-2 network (if the information notification is
rejected), no Calling Name information is displayed on terminals or transmitted to the destination.
4. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - SYS1, Index78, bit5=1: Name Display service is provided
bit3: Dialed number display is;
0/1=Not available/Available
Index79, bit6=0: OAI service is provided
Index241, bit1: Maximum number of digits displayed for Name Display service
0/1 = 8 digits/16 digits of the first part
STEP 2: ARTD/ARTDN- Assign the route class data of NI-2 trunk.
term
DPLY (CDN50): 1 = Connected party number is displayed on D
inter-office connection
for
IND (CDN112) : 1 = Inter-office Name Display service is in service
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 179
Revision 1.0
SID TO TERMINATING USER - DISPLAY
S-93 SID TO TERMINATING USER - DISPLAY
1. General Description
This ISDN feature provides a visual display of the calling station’s number and sub address information on a
term
D
for incoming ISDN calls. This provides the terminal user with a quick and accurate way to identify the
calling station’s number (Station Identification Number, SID).
Calling station No.
Sub Address
ISDN
PRT
Calling station No. + Sub Address (SID)
Dterm
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
None.
CHAPTER 6
Page 180
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
SID TO TERMINATING USER (CALL-BY-CALL) - DISPLAY FOR AT&T (#4ESS)
S-136 SID TO TERMINATING USER (CALL-BY-CALL) - DISPLAY FOR AT&T (#4ESS)
1. General Description
This feature allows a PBX to request either ANI or SID for each incoming call (Call-by-Call) by using a Facility
term
message to the ISDN (AT&T). When a PBX receives ANI or SID by a Facility Acknowledge, a D
(maximum eight digits) on the display.
shows it
Note: During requesting ANI or SID (for a maximum of four seconds) any OG and IC call will not be allowed.
Call Associated TSC will not covered in a PBX.
ANI or SID
PRT
ISDN
(AT&T-
#4ESS)
ANI or SID
Dterm
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ASFC - SFI97=0/1 (-/ANI only)
SFI98=0/1 (-/SID only)
Note: When SFI 97=0 and SFI 98=0, a PBX receives SID of SETUP message.
When SFI 97=1 and SFI 98=1, a PBX receives ANI only.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 181
Revision 1.0
SID TO TERMINATING USER - DTE
S-94
SID TO TERMINATING USER - DTE
1. General Description
term
This ISDN feature permits a DTE connected to terminating D
station number sent from the ISDN network.
via a data adapter to receive the originating
PBX
Dterm
WITH DA
ELC
DTI
ISDN
CALLER
DTE
Note: The ELC card should be set SW01-7 on the card to OFF (8DLC mode).
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
term
STEP 1: ASFC - Allows SID to Terminating User-DTE (SFI = 31) to the SFC of the station (D
).
CHAPTER 6
Page 182
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
SUB ADDRESS - ADDRESSING
S-95
SUB ADDRESS - ADDRESSING
1. General Description
This ISDN feature permits an incoming call to be directed to a designated station by using called-party sub-
address information.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Note: •
When ISDN Address information arrives from the ISDN line assigned for Sub Address-Addressing
and it does not contain the Sub Address information, the call is routed to an Attendant Console.
term
•
When a D
is designated as the destination of an incoming call, the calling party number is
term
automatically presented on the display of the D
.
3. Programming
STEP 2: ARTD - For the Route of the B-channels and D-channel of a 24PRT, which interfaces with the ISDN
line of Sub Addressing, assign DC (CDN 66)=“0”.
PBX
438-2000-3100
PRI
STN: 3100
STN: 3101
ISDN
CALLING PARTY
438-2000-3101
PRI
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 183
Revision 1.0
ACCUNET ACCESS154
A-77
ACCUNET ACCESS154
1. General Description
Communication using 56 kbps, 64 kbps (restricted) or 64 kbps (unrestricted) is possible with terminals
connected to AT&T’s ACCUNET network. The ACCUNET service needs to be provisioned by CO.
ACCUNET
#4ES
PRI
2400
IPX
Note 1: The system does not determine communication compatibility; that is dependent on the terminal types.
Note 2: Data terminals that can be accommodated by the PBX are basically terminals with a transmission
speed of 64 kbps. Communication by terminals with other transmission speeds is not guaranteed.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ACBC - Select CODE 6 (= ACCUNET) in this command.
CHAPTER 6
Page 184
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
B-CHANNEL SERVICE CONTROL
B-27
B-CHANNEL SERVICE CONTROL
1. General Description
A PBX can send a trunk maintenance (SERVICE) message to the ISDN (AT&T-#4ESS, NT-DMS100/250)
when setting or cancelling a trunk make busy using the MBTK command. This function is not provided by NI-2
protocol.
SERV message
NETWORK
PRT
(AT&T/NT)
SERV ACK
IOC
Note: SERV (Service) message = Trunk Maintenance message.
SERV (Service) ACK = Service acknowledgement.
Whether “In Service” mode or “Out of Service” mode of a PBX is determined by a trunk maintenance message
from the network. (Even if a PBX sent a trunk maintenance message setting the PBX to “Out of Service” mode,
the PBX would be set “In Service” when the PBX receives a trunk maintenance message for “In Service” from
the network.)
<For AT&T>
When a PBX has been set to “Out of Service” mode after receiving a trunk maintenance message from the
network, incoming calls from the network would not be allowed.
<For NT>
Even if a PBX has been set to “Out of Service” mode after receiving a trunk maintenance message from the
network, incoming calls from the network would be allowed.
2. Operating Procedure
Using MBTK,
Set make busy to a bothway call (MB=2): A PBX sends a trunk maintenance message.
Cancel the bothway make busy (MB=0):
3. Programming
None.
A PBX sends a trunk maintenance message.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 185
Revision 1.0
CALL-BY-CALL POOL MANAGEMENT
C-106 CALL-BY-CALL POOL MANAGEMENT
1. General Description
A single PRI interface can be used in common by TRUNK PROVISIONING [T-42] and CALL-BY-CALL
SERVICE SELECTION [C-105]. If all the channels that are used by TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE
SELECTION are busy, it is possible to select the channels as used by CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE
SELECTION [C-105].
CHANNEL
1
SERVICE A
8
9
SERVICE B
PRI
13
14
CALL-BY-CALL
23
24
D CHANNEL
Note 1: The services that can be designated include the following:
ACCUNET, MEGACOM, MEGACOM800, and SDN.
Note 2: Channel selection is possible by the LCR function only.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: AFRS - Assign the different OPR (Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number) on a service type
(such as ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.) basis. Therefore, the OPR should be determined
according to the NPC (Number Pattern Code).
STEP 2: AOPR - Assign the common Route Number to all services (ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.).
STEP 3: ACBC - Select a desired service on an OPR basis.
CHAPTER 6
Page 186
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION
C-105 CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION
1. General Description
Services can be selected on a call-by-call basis to all channels of a single PRI interface according to applications.
That is, unlike Trunk Provisioning Service in which services are assigned to specific channels, services may be
used on any available channel.
Note 1: The services that can be designated include the following:
ACCUNET, MEGACOM, MEGACOM800, and SDN.
Note 2: Channel selection is possible by the LCR function only.
Note 3: To identify a terminal to which a call has terminated, data must be registered using the “ACDD”
command so that a call-terminating terminal can be identified by a terminating number.
Note 4: During call termination, there is no indication of which service is being used.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: AFRS - Assign the different OPR (Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number) on a service type
(such as ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.) basis. Therefore, the OPR should be determined
according to the NPC (Number Pattern Code).
STEP 2: AOPR - Assign the common Route Number to all services (ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.).
STEP 3: ACBC - Select desired service on an OPR basis.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 187
Revision 1.0
CCIS TANDEM CALL-CALLING PARTY NUMBER (CPN) DELIVERY TO ISDN & Q-SIG NETWORKS
C-164 CCIS TANDEM CALL-CALLING PARTY NUMBER (CPN) DELIVERY TO ISDN & Q-SIG
NETWORKS
1. General Description
This feature is provided for the call from tie line (CCIS line or Q-SIG) or a station, attendant console for
INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS [I-6] is sent to the public ISDN network (AT&T, NT, NI-2) or Q-SIG
network since Series 7400 software. With this feature, the calling party number can be changed as programmed
and sent to the ISDN network/Q-SIG network. Since the data can be set to designate the received number in
addition to the outgoing route to ISDN network, a variety of calling party number assignment is available.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Service Conditions
1. This feature programmed by ACPNCL/ACPNCN command is effective when:
•
•
•
Calls are originated from CCIS/Q-SIG line to AT&T, NT, NI-2 or Q-SIG network.
Calls are originated from the station to AT&T, NT, NI-2 or Q-SIG network.
Calls are originated from the attendant console which is assigned the individual attendant identification
number to AT & T, NT, NI-2 or Q-SIG network.
2. This feature is not effective when calls are originated from AT&T, NT, NI-2 network to AT&T, NT, NI-2
network.
3. When the registered calling party number is received from CCIS line and sentto AT&T, NT, NI-2 network
by this feature, the access code and the office code, programmed as ACC for RT=0 (self-office) in ARNP,
are not deleted automatically as normal operation (take this into consideration when programming. See the
4. ACNP/ACND or AANDE command data are ineffective when the call corresponding to ACPNCL/
ACPNCN command data is originated toAT&T, NT, NI-2 or Q-SIG network.
5. If number of digits of registered number (RCPN in ACPNCL/ACPNCN data) is less than that of calling
party number sent from CCIS/Q-SIG line, this feature is effective when the first part of the received calling
party number is identical with the registered number.
6. When assigning more than eight digits’ (includes the office code of the self office programmed in ARNP,
RT=0) number to be received from CCIS line, the number (RCPN in ACPNCL/ACPNCN data) must be
assigned as Physical Station Number since Physical Station Number is sent as the calling party number.
7. After the system is upgraded from non-fusion system to fusion system, Physical Station Number and
Telephone Number written in LDM that are programmed in ACPNCL command should be deleted and
assign the new Telephone Number using ACPNCN command unless those numbers are identical with
Telephone Numbers to be written in NDM. If the numbers are not deleted, the system gets the wrong number
data or does not get any number data since the fusion system reads out the NDM data.
8. The fusion system reads out the ACPNCN data. However, if there is no data in ACPNCN, the system reads
the ACPNCL data. The non-fusion system reads out the ACPNCL data only.
9. This feature is not available for the call originated using OAI/ACD feature.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 188
Revision 1.0
CCIS TANDEM CALL-CALLING PARTY NUMBER (CPN) DELIVERY TO ISDN & Q-SIG NETWORKS
4. Programming
1. When programmed at non-fusion PBX (stand-alone system):
STEP:
ACPNCL -
OGRT: Originating RT number
RCPN: Calling party number changed by this service (1~24 digits.)
* Not necessary to assign the whole digits of numbers. See item (5) in Service Conditions.
SKIP:
ADD:
Number of digits to be skipped from the calling party number (0~24)
Number of digits to be added to the calling party number (0~24)
ACPN: Number to be added (up to number of digits assigned at “ADD”, maximum 24 digits)
An example for the call originated through CCIS line to the corresponding ISDN network.
PBX A
Office Code=234
PBX B
Office Code=352
PBX C
Office Code=214
RT100
1
2
3
8172343000
8173524000
8172145000
ISDN
Network
STN no.
STN no.
STN no.
3000
4000
5000
Data in PBX A
Data in PBX B
Data in PBX C
[ARNP]
[ARNP]
[ARNP]
RT=0, ACC=8234
RT=0, ACC=8352
RT=0, ACC=8214
[ACPNCL]
1
2
3
Data for
Data for
Data for
OGRT=100
RCPN=82343
SKIP=1
OGRT=100
RCPN=83524
SKIP=1
OGRT=100
RCPN=5
LEGEND
: CCIS
: ISDN (AT&T, NT, NI-2, Q-SIG)
SKIP=0
ADD=3
ADD=3
ADD=6
ACPN=817
ACPN=817
ACPN=817214
Figure 6-2 Example of a Call Originated through CCIS Line to Corresponding ISDN Network
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 189
Revision 1.0
CCIS TANDEM CALL-CALLING PARTY NUMBER (CPN) DELIVERY TO ISDN & Q-SIG NETWORKS
2. When programmed at fusion node:
STEP : ACPNCN -
OGLGRT:Originating RT number (LogicalRT number)
RCPN: Calling party number changed by this service (1~24 digits.)
* Not necessary to assign the whole digits of numbers. See Item (5) in Service
Conditions.
SKIP:
ADD:
Number of digits to be skipped from the calling party number (0~24)
Number of digits to be added to the calling party number (0~24)
ACPN: Number to be added (up to number of digits assignedat “ADD”, maximum 24 digits)
CHAPTER 6
Page 190
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
D-CHANNEL BACKUP - PRI
D-152 D-CHANNEL BACKUP - PRI
1. General Description
D-channel Backup feature is available in Non-Facility Associated Signaling (for AT&T/NT/N-ISDN2).
•
•
•
Changeover to Backup D-channel automatically executes when a link of ACT D-channel is down.
You can change D-channel from ACT to Backup by using MAT (The command CDBU).
Both Primary D-channel and Backup D-channel must be located in the same LP.
Note: Primary Dch must be given the interface ID=0 and Backup Dch must be given the interface ID=1 by the
ISDN provider (CO.)
Non-Facility Associated Signaling
23B+D
PRT
Bch: RT20
Dch: RT21
24B
ISDN
PRT
PRT
23B+D (Backup Dch)
2. Operating Procedure
•
•
No manual operation is required. (Automatic changeover)
By the command CDBU of MAT.
Note: When a changeover, a System Message “23-P” or “23-Q” is output.
3. Programming
STEP 1: Assign the numbering (LCR) data to access to ISDN.
- CDN115 (CMRT)=1 to both Bch and Dch.
Note: This step is necessary when you give a common route number to all B-channels.
The circuit cards used to assign a Common Route should be accommodated in the same LP.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 191
Revision 1.0
D-CHANNEL BACKUP - PRI
<For example> RT=20 TK1-TK70 (Bch)
STEP 4: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) to Bch route and Dch route.
<For example> RT=20 (Bch)
RT=21 (Dch)
PC=20
PC=20
STEP 5: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch Handler) and Bch.
<For example>
3
1
2
PIM0
Note: Backup Dch is Located on PRT
.
2
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
Group
No.
CSCG=140 (Even No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00008
Dch (DCH)
Backup Dch (Backup DCH)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Dch (DCH)
—
—
CSCG=141 (Odd No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00008
Bch (PRT ①) INT 0
Bch (PRT ①) INT 1
Bch (PRT ①) INT 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00012
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Bch (PRT ①)
Note that the circuit card needs to be initialized after changing data.
STEP 6: ACIC1 - Assign CSCG corresponding to PC (Point Code).
<For example>
PC=20
CSCG=140
STEP 7: ATRK - Assign the trunk data of Dch.
<For example> RT=21 TK1-TK2 (Dch)
RT=21 TK3-TK4 (Backup Dch)
CHAPTER 6
Page 192
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
D-CHANNEL BACKUP - PRI
4. System Message
1. “23-P” Automatic changeover for Dch Backup
1: XX XX XX XX
XX XX
Backup Dch
Primary Dch
0= ACT
1= STBY
2= Out of Service
3= MB
4= Waiting (Under changing)
5= Manual changeover is out of service
00: Changeover Primary→Backup
01: Changeover Backup→Primary
10: Primary is set to ACT
Location of Backup side Dch
Unit
Group
MG
11: Backup is set to ACT
Location of Primary side Dch
00= SERV. message is received
Unit
Group
01= SERV. message is sent
MG
Condition: 1=Start
2=Normal End
3=Failure
2. “23-Q” Manual changeover for Dch Backup
1: XX XX XX XX XX XX
Backup Dch
Primary Dch
0= ACT
1= STBY
2= Out of Service
3= MB
4= Waiting (Under changing)
5= Manual changeover is out of service
00: Changeover Primary→Backup
01: Changeover Backup→Primary
10: Primary is set to ACT
Location of Backup side Dch
Unit
Group
MG
11: Backup is set to ACT
Location of Primary side Dch
00= Changeover by MAT
01= Changeover by circuit card MB
02= Changeover by Dch MB
03= Not define the way of changeover
Unit
Group
MG
Condition: 1=Start
2=Normal End
3=Failure
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 193
Revision 1.0
MEGACOM ACCESS
M-76
MEGACOM ACCESS
1. General Description
AT&T’s MEGACOM (WATS) network can be used.
MEGACOM
#4ES
PRI
2400
IPX
Note 1: The available WATS service is limited to MSB (Maximal Subscribed WATS Band).
Note 2: The parameter band service where zone is specified on a call-by-call basis is provided by the #5ESS
only.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: ACBC - Select CODE3 (=MEGACOM) in this command.
CHAPTER 6
Page 194
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
MEGACOM800 SERVICE
M-77
MEGACOM800 SERVICE
1. General Description
AT&T’s MEGACOM 800 (INWARD WATS) network can be used.
MEGACOM
#4ES
PRI
MEGACOM 800
2400
IPX
Note 1: When a call has terminated by the CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION [C-105], no indication to
distinguish it from a call termination by other services is made to a terminating terminal.
Note 2: To identify a terminal to which a call has terminated, data must be registered using the “ACDD” com-
mand so that a call-terminating terminal can be identified by a terminating number.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: ACBC - Select CODE2 (=MEGACOM 800) in this command.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 195
Revision 1.0
NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI
N-40 NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI
1. General Description
A single D-channel can control more than the 23 bearer channels (23 B-channels) resident on the same T1
facility.
Capacity: Max. 167B + D (1-IMG system)
Max. 191B + D (4-IMG system)
7 Circuit Cards (1-24 PRT + 6-24DTRS
8 Circuit Cards (1-24 PRT x 7-24 DTR)
Note: Please use this feature with D-CHANNEL BACKUP to improve reliability.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
1. All B-channels use the Common Route Number.
Note: Circuit cards used for the Common Route should be accommodated in the same LP.
Dch: RT21
23B+D
PRT
ISDN
Bch: RT20
24B
PRT
STEP 1: Assign the numbering (LCR) data to access to ISDN.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign the route data. (Refer to “CHAPTER 3”)
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign CDN115 (CMRT)=1 to both Bch and Dch.
STEP 4: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for B-ch. Note that the trunk data for Dch is set after STEP 7: ACIC1
Assign 47 Bch to RT20 in this example.
STEP 5: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) to Bch route and Dch route.
<For example> RT=20 (Bch) PC=20
RT=21 (Dch) PC=20
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 196
Revision 1.0
NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI
STEP 6: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch Handler) and Bch.
<For example>
PIM0
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
Group
No.
CSCG=140 (Even No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Dch (DCH)
—
—
CSCG=141 (Odd No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00008
Bch (PRT for 23B+D)
Bch (PRT for 24B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Bch (PRT for 23B+D)
Note that the circuit card initial is required after changing data.
STEP 7: ACIC1 - Assign CSCG corresponding to PC (Point Code).
<For example> PC=20 CSCG=140
STEP 8: ATRK - Assign the trunk data of Dch.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 197
Revision 1.0
NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI
2. Each B-channel uses the Individual Route Number.
Dch: RT31
Bch: RT30
23B+D
PRT
ISDN
Bch: RT32
24B
PRT
STEP 1: Assign the numbering (LCR) data to access to ISDN.
Assign 23 Bch to RT30, 24 Bch to RT32 in this example. Note that trunk data assigned in
this step is for Bch only. Dch’s trunk data should be set after STEP 6: ACIC1 command
assignment.
STEP 4: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) to Bch route and Dch route.
<For example> RT=30 (Bch) PC=20
RT=31 (Dch) PC=20
RT=32 (Bch) PC=20
CHAPTER 6
Page 198
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED SIGNALING - PRI
STEP 5: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch Handler) and Bch.
<For example>
PIM0
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
Group
No.
CSCG=140 (Even No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Dch (DCH)
—
—
CSCG=141 (Odd No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 00004
00008
Bch (PRT for 23B+D)
Bch (PRT for 24B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
Bch (PRT for 23B+D)
Note that the circuit card initial is required after changing data.
STEP 6: ACIC1 - Assign CSCG corresponding to PC (Point Code).
<For example> PC=20 CSCG=140
STEP 7: ATRK - Assign the trunk data for Dch.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 199
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG/ISDN INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCHING
Q-5 Q-SIG/ISDN INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCHING
1. General Description
This feature allows converting a User Information Layer 1 Protocol (µ-law/A-law) of call originated to ISDN
line according to the office data. See the figure below for examples.
[Case 1: Conversion in tandem office]
(a)Incoming Call from ISDN line (SETUP message is received)
When µ-law is selected as output Layer 1 protocol to outgoing trunk.
NEAX2400 IPX (A-law)
PBX
PBX
(A-law)
(µ-law)
ARTI data:
µ-law (UALAW = 1)
µ-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
A-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
µ-law
When non-conversion is selected to outgoing trunk (the Layer 1 protocol is output as received).
NEAX2400 IPX ( A-law)
PBX
ARTI data:
non-conversion
PBX
(UALAW = 0)
A-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
A-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
Incoming Call from ACIS/CCIS line (SETUP message is not received)
When A-law is selected as output Layer 1 protocol to outgoing trunk.
NEAX2400 IPX (µ-law)
PBX
PBX
(A-law)
(µ-law)
ARTI data:
A-law (UALAW = 2)
A-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
A-law
ACIS/CCIS Line
CHAPTER 6
Page 200
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG/ISDN INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCHING
[Case 2: Conversion in Originating Office]
term
(a) Outgoing Call from D
/ATT (SETUP message is not sent)
When A-law is selected as output Layer 1 protocol to an outgoing trunk.
NEAX2400 IPX
PBX
(A-law)
ARTI data:
A-law (UALAW = 2)
A-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
A-law
NEC
(b) Outgoing Call from ISDN terminal/PS (SETUP message is sent)
When µ-law is selected as output Layer 1 protocol to an outgoing trunk.
NEAX2400 IPX
PBX
(µ-law)
A-law (SETUP)
ARTI data:
µ-law (UALAW = 1)
µ-law (SETUP)
ISDN Line
A-law
µ-law
(SETUP)
C
a
rrity
3
1
2
5
8
6
9
4
7
0
*
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Service Conditions
1. This feature is available since Series 7400 Release 9 software.
2. This feature is available for a call to ISDN line (This feature does not support the station-to-station call nor
an outgoing call to CCIS line).
3. Only user information Layer 1 protocol included with Bearer Capability (BC) information element is
converted. Layer 1 protocol included with Low Layer Capability (LLC) and the other information element
are not applied.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 201
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG/ISDN INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCHING
4. When the protocol is selected as AUSTRALIA in the route class data (assigned in ARTD, CDN65: INT)
and the coding standard is “00” in BC information element, call in A-law only can be connected (call in µ-
law is disconnected).
5. This feature is activated when SETUP message is sent.
6. This feature is available only when user information Layer 1 protocol is A-law or µ-law (JT-V110/X30 or
JT-X31, etc. cannot be converted).
7. The user information Layer 1 protocol is not added to SETUP message if the received BC information
element does not contain the Layer 1 protocol.
8. Law conversion rule varies depending on the kind of outgoing trunk/terminal and incoming trunk/terminal
Table 5-1 Reference: Output Layer 1 Protocol
- : Not Applicable
TRUNK
TERMINAL
IC
ISDN trunk
Dterm
Analog
station,
ATT
/
ISDN
terminal
(ILC), PS
CCIS
trunk
ACIS
trunk
PRI
terminal
ARTI:
non-
conversion
OG
ARTI:
µ-law
ARTI:
A-law
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
ARTI:
non-conversion
Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion
Conversion Conversion
ISDN
trunk
ARTI: µ-law
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
ARTI: A-law
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
CCIS trunk
ACIS trunk
–
–
Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion
Conversion Conversion
–
–
–
–
–
–
Non-
Non-
ISDN terminal (ILC)
Conversion Conversion
Non- Non-
Conversion Conversion
Non-
Non-
Non-
Non-
ARTI:
non-conversion
Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion
PRI
terminal
ARTI: µ-law
ARTI: A-law
PS
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Dterm/Analog station, ATT
Note 1: Follows the system data assignment (SYS1, INDEX64, b0: 0/1=µ-law/A-law).
Note 2: Non-conversion except when the ISDN terminal interface specification is assigned as N-ISDN1 by the
system data assignment (In this case, the output Layer 1 protocol is fixed as µ-law).
Note 3: Varies depending on the terminal type.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 202
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG/ISDN INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCHING
4. Interactions
This feature is applied for H0/H11 terminal when the service conditions described in Item 3 under Service
Conditions are satisfied.
5. Programming
STEP 1: ARTI - Assign the Trunk Application data to the outgoing ISDN trunk.
CDN 57: UALAW (User information Layer 1 protocol designation)
0 = No Conversion
1 = µ-law
2 = A-law
3 = Not used
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 203
Revision 1.0
SDN ACCESS
S-90
SDN ACCESS
1. General Description
AT&T’s SDN (Software Defined Network) can be used.
SDN
#4ES
#4ES
PRI
PRI
2400
IPX
2400
IPX
Note 1: When a call has terminated by the CALL-BY-CALL SERVICE SELECTION [C-105], no indication to
distinguish it from a call termination by other services is made to a terminating terminal.
Note 2: To identify a terminal to which a call has terminated, data must be registered using the “ACDD”
command so that a call-terminating terminal can be identified by a terminating number.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: ACBC - Select CODE1 (=WATS BAND/SDN) in this command.
CHAPTER 6
Page 204
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
SID TO NETWORK - PRESENT/SID TO NETWORK - PRIVACY
S-91/S-92 SID TO NETWORK - PRESENT/SID TO NETWORK - PRIVACY
1. General Description
<SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT>
This feature allows SID (Station Identification Number) to be delivered to the ISDN when a call originates from
a terminal connected to the PBX.
<SID TO NETWORK-PRIVACY>
In addition, the originating station user may control the transfer of SID to the network via AUTHORIZATION
CODE dialing through the PBX.
2. Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial an access code for “Authorization Code”. (For SID TO NETWORK-PRIVACY)
3. Dial “Authorization Code”. (For SID TO NETWORK-PRIVACY)
4. Dial an originating call number to ISDN.
Note: Without dialing the authorization code, SID is sent to the destination.
3. Programming
Note: When two or more DID numbers are assigned to a station, the last DID number assigned will be delivered
to the ISDN as a Station Identification Number (SID). However, when the last DID number assigned has
been deleted [even if the other number(s) still exist], any DID number is not transferred to the network
(no SID is transferred to a destination). In this case, reassignment of the DID number(s) is necessary for
sending SID to the network.
STEP 2: ACNP - Assign the pattern number for Bch route.
OG/IC=O (Select “OG”)
RT=Bch Route number
CNP=Pattern Number
STEP 3: ACND - Assign the information for the pattern.
CNP=Pattern Number (Must be same pattern No. as one of ACNP).
ADD=Number of additional digit (Pilot number)
DC=Pilot Number
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 205
Revision 1.0
SID TO NETWORK - PRESENT/SID TO NETWORK - PRIVACY
.
Note 1
When the originating PRT employs “Sub addressing” for the terminating call .
ISDN
PRT
STA:2000
Bch=RT10
Pilot Number : 03-222-4111
ACNP: OG/IC=O
RT=10
ACND: CNP=1
SKIP=4
CNP=1
ADD=9
DC=032224111
Digits “032224111” are sent as SID.
Note 2
When the originating PRT employs “DID-Addressing” for the terminating call.
ISDN
PRT
511
Station for
Bch=RT10
DID-Addressing
Pilot Number : 03-222-4111
ACNP: OG/IC=O
RT=10
ACND: CNP=2
SKIP=0
CNP=2
ADD=5
DC=03222
•
•
Digits “03222 + DID No.” are sent as SID.
When the station that does not require the digit conversion (in the ACDD command) for a incoming call
originates a call to ISDN, the network will send a pilot number as SID.
<For SID TO NETWORK-PRIVACY>
STEP 4: ASFC - Allow SID to Network-Privacy (SFI 94) to the SFC of the station.
SFI94=0/1=-/SID is not transfer to a destination.
Note: This data is necessary for the temporary class to be converted by Authorization code.
STEP 5: Assign “Authorization Code” data.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 206
Revision 1.0
SUB ADDRESS - PRESENT
S-96
SUB ADDRESS - PRESENT
1. General Description
This ISDN feature allows a PRIMARY RATE INTERFACE ISDN trunk to transfer the called-party sub-address
information to a destination ISDN station when the call is originated via the PBX. This feature requires dialing
of the called-party station number and the called-party sub-address.
2. Operating Procedure
1. The calling station dials the ISDN subscriber number (including access code) followed by an asterisk (*),
then dials the called-party sub-address followed by a pound (#).
2. ISDN will automatically recognize the sub-address and transfer this information to the destination party.
3. Programming
Note: ASPA- Assign SUB=1.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 207
Revision 1.0
TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION
T-42 TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION
1. General Description
Each channel of a PRI interface can be dedicated to a particular service. Services are designated to specific
channels; once designated, a channel can only be used for that service.
CHANNEL
1
SERVICE A
10
PRI
11
SERVICE B
23
24
D CHANNEL
Note 1: The services that can be designated include the following:
ACCUNET, MEGACOM, MEGACOM800, and SDN.
Note 2: Channel selection is possible by the LCR function only.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
In addition to the Basic Office Data for ISDN, the following data should be assigned.
STEP 1: AFRS - Assign the different OPR (Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number) on a service type
(such as ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.) basis. Therefore, the OPR should be determined
according to the NPC (Number Pattern Code).
STEP 2: AOPR - Assign the different Route Number to each service (ACCUNET, MEGACOM, etc.).
STEP 3: ACBC - Select a desired service on an OPR basis.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 208
Revision 1.0
WIDE BAND SWITCHING FOR AT&T #4ESS
W-9
WIDE BAND SWITCHING FOR AT&T #4ESS
1. General Description
This feature allows a PBX to support the H0 (384 kbps)/H11 (1.5 Mbps) switching by using AT&T #4ESS.
PRT
23B+D
PRT
23B+D
H0
PRT
23B+D
AT&T
PRT
23B+D
H11
PRT
24B
PRT
24B
Trunk for Wide Band Switching
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: Assign the Basic Data for ISDN/Non-Facility Associated Signaling Data.
Note
ARTD - CDN63 (LYER1)=0
CDN65 (INT)=5
CDN96 (H1)=1
CDN118 (BOB)=1
STEP 2: ACBC - Assign the Call by Call Service Data
CODE=1 (SDN) or 6 (ACCUNET)
Note: If H0 switching, the continuous six channels are required.
Separate the Bch route (for H0 switching) from others.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 209
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY INFORMATION TRANSFER/TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM)
C-112/T-44 CALLING PARTY INFORMATION TRANSFER/TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM)
1. General Description
<CALLING PARTY INFORMATION TRANSFER>
When attribute data (BC, LLC, HLC) arrives from the ISDN or an ISDN terminal, this service notifies the
received attribute data to another office which is connected through CCIS.
This service guarantees transparent transmission of attribute data between an office and another through CCIS.
<TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM)>
When a station calls another station performing CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS-CCIS, this feature allows the
originating station number (SID) to be sent to the destination station via Transfer Message (TRM) signal.
DIRECT OG CALL TO ISDN
OG CALL TO ISDN VIA CCIS
CALLER
BEARER
Speech
LOW LAYER
HIGH LAYER
BEARER
Speech
LOW LAYER
HIGH LAYER
–
–
–
–
–
–
Telephone
Speech
–
Speech
–
ATT-CON
FAX
3.1 kHz
3.1 kHz
Unrestricted
G2/G3FAX
–
3.1 kHz
3.1 kHz
Unrestricted
G2/G3FAX
–
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
DATA (DTE)
ISDN Station/
Trunk
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
3.1 kHz
Transparent
–
Transparent
–
Transparent
3.1 kHz
Transparent
–
Transparent
–
CCIS Trunk
ACIS Trunk
2. Operating Procedure
No manual is operation required.
CHAPTER 6
Page 210
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY INFORMATION TRANSFER/TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM)
3. Programming
STEP 1: Assign the Basic Data for ISDN.
SYS-1 Index 4, b4:
Temporary Class Conversion
0/1=Not Required/Required. (always assign “1”)
Index 82, b4-b7: Station Number Display Pattern on theATTCON
Index 180&181: Originating Point Code
Index 182&183: Centralized Billing Point Code
Index 184&185: Centralized Management Report Point Code
Index 186:
Index 187:
Service Check
Number of CCH/DCH cards
(always assign 00 Hex)
Index 188, b0:
No. 7 CCIS Control System Interoffice Audit Test
0/1=Not Required/Required.
Index 189, b4-b7 ACM, UBM Signal “No-Receiving” Timer (Normally assign
F0 Hex.)
Note: ISDN transmitting information service is necessary for the transparency of ISDN information between
ISDN and CCIS No. 7 network.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the following route class data for CCIS Trunk
(Signal Channel & Speech Channel)
ROUTE FOR SIGNAL CHANNEL
ROUTE FOR SPEECH CHANNEL
• OSGS
• ONSG
• ISGS
• INSG
• TCL
• L/T
= 0
= 2
= 0
= 2
= 4
= 1
= 2
= 13
= 0
= 7
= 0
= 0
= 0
= 0
= 0
• OSGS
• ONSG
• ISGS
• INSG
• TCL
• L/T
• RLP
• LSG
• ANS
• PAD
• BT
= 0
= 2
= 0
= 2
= 4
= 1
= 2
= 12
= 1
= 4
= 1
= 1
= 0
= 0
= 0
• RLP
• LSG
• ANS
• PAD
• BT
• DPLY
• LYER1
• NET
• INT
• DPLY
• LYER1
• NET
• INT
STEP 4: ARTD - Assign a following data to the speech route of CCIS No. 7.
CDN98 (CI) ISDN transmitting information.
0=
Out of service
→ 1=
16-Digit Caller Number Service, Attribute Information Notification service,
and Calling Sub-Address Transfer Service.
2-15= Not used.
Assign data “1” in this CDN.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 211
Revision 1.0
CALLING PARTY INFORMATION TRANSFER/TRANSFER MESSAGE (TRM)
STEP 5: ADPC - Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data. Note
Setting of the counter office point code
RT: Route Number
PC: Determinate Point Code (1-16367)
Assign of the LENS of the trunks to be used in CCIS
LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
Setting of CCH/CSE Number of the route to be used in CCIS
CSCG:
CSC Group Number (130~255)
CIC GROUPPX: Circuit Identification Code Group Number (0~7)
CCH:
CCH:
Accommodation location of the Common Channel Handler
XX
*a
X
*b
XX
*c
*a:
*b:
*c:
Module Group Number (00~07)
Unit Number (0~3)
Group Number (0~23)
Setting of CIC of each trunk to be used in CCIS
PC: Determinate Point Code (1-16367)
CSCG: Common Channel Signalling Controller Group Number (130~255)
PC: Determinate Point Code
CIC:
LENS:
LENS:
Circuit Identification code Number (1~999)
Line Equipment Number (6 Digits)
XX
*a
X
*b
XX
*c
X
*d
*a:
*b:
*c:
*d:
Module Group Number (00~07)
Unit Number (0~3)
Group Number (0~23)
Level Number (0~7)
STEP 10: ARNP - Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data
Assignment of the office code of the self office if necessary.
RT:
Route Number (RT=0)
ACC: Access Code (maximum 3 digits)
Note: For details, see “No. 7 CCIS System Manual”.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 212
Revision 1.0
NATIONAL - ISDN2 - PRI
N-42
NATIONAL - ISDN2 - PRI
1. General Description
This feature allows the system to connect with N-ISDN2 network. NON-FACILITY ASSOCIATED
SIGNALING and D-CHANNEL BACKUP are also available.
PRT
National
ISDN2
Note 1: Network-side services, VIRTUAL TIE LINE, and B-ISDN services are not available.
Note 2: The following issues of firmwares are required.
CIRCUIT CARD
PA-24PRTB-A
FIRMWARE
ISSUE
SP-3029 24PRT PROG-B
SP-3010 24DTI PROG-A
9 or later
6 or later
PA-24DTR
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Programming
STEP 1: ARTD - Assign the following CDN data for the N-ISDN2 route.
CDN65 (INT): 1( N-ISDN2)
STEP 2: ACBC - Assign Call by Call data for each OPR.
NET:
2(N-ISDN2)
SERV: 1 (SERVICE)
CODE: Facility Coding Value
1: INWATS
2: OUTWATS
3: FX
4: Tie Trunk
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 213
Revision 1.0
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
V-18
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
1. General Description
This service feature provides the virtual tie line service by setting up a connection between a PBX and another
via ISDN network during the designated period of time.
While the virtual tie line is set, one of the B-channels on the setup connection is used as a CCIS No. 7 signal
channel and other B-channels as CCIS No. 7 voice channels.
<Structure of Virtual Tie Line>
ISDN
B-ch
B-ch
PBX
PBX
PRT
PRT
B-ch
Virtual Tie Line (6B x n)
CCH
CCH
D-ch
D-ch
CHAPTER 6
Page 214
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
•
Service Status
PBX
PBX
PBX
PBX
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
ISDN
Virtual Tie Line is set at 8:30AM (for example)
PBX
PRT
ISDN
Bxn
Bxn
Note
Virtual Tie Line is cancelled at 5:20PM (for example)
PBX
PRT
ISDN
Note: When a call is connected to the Virtual Tie Line at the time designated to cancel the connection, the
connection is extended by 10 minutes (maximum 30 minutes) to wait for the call to be released. After
30 minutes, the calls connected to the line will be released forcefully.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 215
Revision 1.0
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
Setup/Cancel Protocol for Virtual Tie Line
•
PBX
ISDN
PBX
Setup
Virtual
Tie Line
(CCIS No.7)
Talk/Communicate
D
ISC
Cancel
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 216
Revision 1.0
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
3. Programming
Note 1: If in Virtual Tie Line network, an alternative route cannot be assigned.
Note 2: Example for ports allocation of the command ATRK.
24PRT
LV7 Bch-8
LV6 Bch-7
LV5 Bch-6
LV4 Bch-5
LV3 Bch-4
LV2 Bch-3
LV1 Bch-2
LV0 Bch-1
LV7
Dch
SIG-ch
Speech
Speech
Speech
Speech
Speech
Bch-17
Bch-16
Bch-15
Bch-14
Bch-13
Bch-12
Bch-11
Bch-10
Bch-9
CCIS
Odd
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
Even
LV1
LV0 DCH
STEP 2: Assign the data for CCIS No. 7.
STEP 3: Assign the Virtual Tie Line data.
For the originating office: AVTL - Assign a schedule for Virtual Tie Line implementation period.
TL/SPC (T/S): Time Link/Semi Permanent Connection
DATE:
PTN:
IC/OG:
RT:
Pattern number (0-15)
OG
Route No. used for Virtual Tie Line
First trunk No. ofVirtual Tie Line route.
TK:
D-LENS: LENS of DCH used for setting Virtual Tie Line
CALLING: The number of ISDN line of the self office
KEY PAD:
CALLED: The Virtual Tie Line number of ISDN line of the
facing (terminating) office
SUB:
0
WEEK:
TIME:
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 217
Revision 1.0
VIRTUAL TIE LINE
For the terminating office: AVTL - Assign a schedule for Virtual Tie Line implementation period.
TL/SPC (T/S): Time Link/Semi Permanent Connection
DATE:
PTN:
IC/OG:
RT:
Pattern number
IC
Route No. used for Virtual Tie Line
First trunk No. ofVirtual Tie Line route.
TK:
D-LENS: LENS of DCH
CH:
CALLING: The number of ISDN line of the facing
(originating) office
SUB:
0
WEEK:
TIME:
AVTC - Assign a Virtual Tie Line Call data
TN:
STN:
Note 1: Data of DATE, WEEK, TIME and CH must match between the originating office and the terminating
office.
Note 2: In addition, “DID-Addressing” data is necessary for both Bch of ISDN and Speech CH of CCIS No. 7.
ARTD-CDN66 (DC)
ACDD-Assign a data for digits conversion to Virtual Tie Line number as follows;
Bch
RT=10
Speech RT=20
ISDN
DID No. 234-1111
Virtual Tie Line
No. 2255
• D/N=D RT=10 DC=1111, CDC=2255
A/D=0, XFR=0
• D/N=D RT=20 DC=1111, CDC=2255
A/D=0, XFR=0
CHAPTER 6
Page 218
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
E-23
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
1. General Description
This feature provides VIRTUAL TIE LINE for each event such as call origination and MCI message
transmission. Inter-PBX link for this feature is established on B-channels of the public ISDN line using CCIS
No. 7 signaling protocol. For addressing a specific terminal, Called Sub Address or Called DID Number is used
depending on the network configuration.
2. Operating Procedure
None.
3. Service Conditions
1. The ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunk is used for this feature.
2. The following ISDN interfaces are available:
4 ESS
DMS 100
N-ISDN2
3. When using Called Sub Address as addressing information:
(a) channel negotiation and Sub Address-Addressing must be available in the public ISDN network.
(b) different DID Numbers must be assigned to the ISDN line, the E-CCIS line and its alternate route. For
the E-CCIS line, DID Number is required for each D-channel.
(c) Sub Address assigned to the E-CCIS trunk must be common to both offices.
4. When using Called DID Number as addressing information:
(a) a different DID Number is required for each channel of the E-CCIS line.
(b) when channel negotiation is not available, call termination to an E-CCIS trunk must not be allowed
except when DID Number assigned to the trunk is dialed.
(c) different DID Numbers must be assigned to the ISDN line and the E-CCIS line. For the E-CCIS line,
DID Number is required for each D-channel.
(d) alternate route for the E-CCIS line cannot be assigned.
5. Each trunk for the E-CCIS line cannot be used for the public ISDN line.
6. Each channel used for a E-CCIS line must be controlled by a single D-channel (i.e. Each channel must be
assigned to a single ISDN line).
7. Billing information on the E-CCIS line does not include Access Code or Converted Number.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 219
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
8. The following features are available for the E-CCIS line:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Asynchronous Data Switching [A-44] Note
Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication – CCIS [A-45]
Attendant-Controlled Conference – CCIS [A-46]
Automatic Recall – CCIS [A-71]
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) – CCIS [A-87]
Busy Verification – CCIS [B-9]
Brokerage Hotline – CCIS [B-10]
Call Back – CCIS [C-44]
Call Forwarding – All Calls – CCIS [C-45]
Call Forwarding – Busy Line – CCIS [C-46]
Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer – CCIS [C-47]
Call Forwarding – Intercept – CCIS [C-48]
Call Forwarding – Override – CCIS [C-49]
Call Transfer – All Calls – CCIS [C-50]
Called Station Status Display – CCIS [C-51]
Calling/Called Number Display – CCIS [C-52]
Call Processing Indication – CCIS [C-53]
Call Transfer – Attendant – CCIS [C-54]
Consultation Hold – All Calls – CCIS [C-58]
Call Forwarding Assignment – Attendant – CCIS [C-94]
Data Communication – CCIS [D-41] Note
Data Interface – Automatic Answer – CCIS [D-65] Note
Data Line Security – CCIS [D-66] Note
Data Line Privacy – CCIS [D-67] Note
Data Privacy on Demand – CCIS [D-68] Note
Data Transparency – CCIS [D-69] Note
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark – CCIS [D-70]
Dial Access to Attendant – CCIS [D-71]
Digital Display – Station – CCIS [D-72]
Digital Display – Trunk – CCIS [D-73]
Direct-In Termination – CCIS [D-74]
Distinctive Ringing – CCIS [D-75]
term
Do Not Disturb – D
– CCIS [D-76D]
Data Hotline – CCIS [D-86] Note
Dialed Number Display – Recall – CCIS [D-91]
term
Dual Hold D
– CCIS [D-93D]
Executive Right-of-Way – CCIS [E-8]
Elapsed Time Display – CCIS [E-9]
E-911 ANI Unified Number of Digits – CCIS [E-20]
Flexible Numbering of Stations – CCIS [F-12]
term
Hands-Free Answerback – D
House Phone – CCIS [H-11]
– CCIS [H-10D]
CHAPTER 6
Page 220
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hotline – CCIS [H-12]
Incoming Call Identification – CCIS [I-16]
Individual Attendant Access – CCIS [I-17]
Inter-Position Transfer – CCIS [I-18]
Individual Trunk Access – CCIS [I-19]
Look Ahead Routing – CCIS [L-25]
LDN Night Connection – CCIS [L-29]
Message Reminder – CCIS [M-34]
term
Message Reminder – D
– CCIS [M-34D]
Message Waiting Lamp Setting – Attendant – CCIS [M-35]
Message Waiting Lamp Setting – Station – CCIS [M-36]
Miscellaneous Trunk Access – CCIS [M-37]
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction – CCIS [M-38]
Modem Pooling – CCIS [M-39] Note
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls – CCIS [M-40]
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line – CCIS [M-41]
Multiple Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer – CCIS [M-42]
Multiple Console Operation – CCIS [M-43]
Message Center Interface – CCIS [M-67]
Night Connection – Fixed – CCIS [N-15]
Night Connection – Flexible – CCIS [N-16]
Name Display – System – CCIS [N-37]
Off-Hook Queuing – CCIS [O-11]
Outgoing Trunk Queuing – CCIS [O-12]
Paging Access – CCIS [P-28]
Restriction from Outgoing Calls – CCIS [R-22]
Serial Call – CCIS [S-52]
term
Service Display – D
– CCIS [S-53D]
Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission – CCIS [S-54]
Single-Digit Station Calling – CCIS [S-55]
Station Controlled Conference – CCIS [S-56]
Station-to-Station Calling – CCIS [S-57]
Station-to-Station Calling – Operator Assistance – CCIS [S-58]
Step Call – CCIS [S-59]
Synchronous Data Switching – CCIS [S-60]
Supervisory Call – CCIS [S-73]
Toll Restriction – 3/6-Digit – CCIS [T-26]
Trunk Answer from Any Station – CCIS [T-27]
Uniform Numbering Plan – CCIS [U-5]
Voice Call – CCIS [V-7]
Note: When A/D=1(Digital) is assigned by CDN45. ARTD, this feature is available.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 221
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
9. The following features are available only when the signal-channel link of the E-CCIS line is established:
•
•
Centralized Billing-CCIS [C-55]
Centralized System Management Report – CCIS [C-57]
10. When a RELEASE COMPLETE message (Cause number 34 [No circuit/channel available] /44
[Requested circuit/channel not available]) or DISCONNECT message is received from an ISDN network,
route advance is executed according to the parameter RA (Order of Route Advancing) ofAOPR command.
Route advance is available when a calling party is under the following status.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Station without a held station/trunk
Station with a held station
Station with a held trunk
Tandem Connection
Attendant Console without a held station/trunk
Attendant Console with a held station
Attendant Console with a held trunk
However, route advance is not available in the following cases:
•
•
•
Call origination from an ISDN terminal
Tandem connection from an MFC trunk
Data communication
When route advance is executed, the following services are not available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
OFF-HOOK QUEUING [O-7]
OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING [O-2]
INTER-OFFICE OFF – HOOK QUEUING [I-11]
OUTGOING TRUNK BUSY ANNOUNCEMENT [O-21]
ROUTE RESTRICTION – ANNOUNCEMENT [R-27]
Dialing AUTHORIZATION CODE [A-21] from an ISDN trunk
4. Programming
CHAPTER 6
Page 222
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
Note: Example of ports allocation by ATRK command is shown below.
24PRT
Bch-8
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
Dch
Bch-7
Bch-6
Bch-5
Bch-4
Bch-3
Bch-2
Bch-1
Signal
Speech
Speech
Speech
Speech
Speech
Bch-17
Bch-16
Bch-15
Bch-14
Bch-13
Bch-12
Bch-11
Bch-10
Bch-9
Odd
CCIS
Even
DCH
STEP 2: Assign CCIS No. 7 related data.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign Bearer Capability for the speech channels of the E-CCIS line.
CDN:45 A/D: 0/1 = Analog (Bearer Capability: Speech)/
Digital (Bearer Capability: Unrestricted Digital)
Note that Bearer Capability for the signal channel is Unrestricted Digital only.
Assign Trunk Selection Sequence.
CDN:49 TRKS: 0/1= Select the trunk (CIC No.) in ascending order/descending order,
which assigned by the ACSC command.
Note that each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of
call origination.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 223
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
Assign Dialed Number confirmation for the E-CCIS (speech channel) RT and the E-CCIS (signal channel) RT.
CDN : 66 DC: Assign the same value as the ARTD command of CDN 66 (DC) which assigned for common
ISDN (speech channel RT)
STEP 4: ARTI - Assign the following CDN data for the E-CCIS route.
ECCIS (Event Based CCIS): 1
ECCISTM: Release Timer for the E-CCIS line
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
3 minutes (Default)
15 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
1 hour
10-13: Not used
14:
Immediately after call completion (for Speech Channel)/
1 minute (for Signal Channel)
Not released
15:
ECCISOB: OG Billing for E-CCIS Line
0:
1:
Not required
Required
ECCISIB: IC Billing for E-CCIS Line
0:
1:
Not required
Required
ECCISTD: Addressing information used in E-CCIS
0:
1:
Called DID Number
Called Sub Address
CHAPTER 6
Page 224
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
STEP 5: AEVT - Assign virtual tie line data for E-CCIS.
RT:
TK:
Route Number
Trunk Number
TYPE:
System type (Dch is used commonly or separately with ISDN trunk)
DESTINATION: Destination Number (Maximum 6 digits)
CALLING:
CALLED:
C_RT:
Calling Number (Maximum 24 digits)
CCIS Signal Route Number
C_TK:
CCIS Signal Trunk Number
VRY:
0: Not required
1: Required
OPR:
RA:
Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service
Order of Route Advance of CBC Service
Note: When Verification of Connection is in service, if the last four digits of the received number is not equal to
those of Called Number, the connection is not established.
STEP 6: AVTC - Assign Virtual Tie Line Number for the E-CCIS route.
STEP 7: ACBC - If required, assign Call by Call data for the E-CCIS route.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 225
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
Examples of Data Assignment for the E-CCIS line
•
Example of port allocation when using Called Sub Address as addressing information Note
24PRT
RT110 TK1
RT120 TK1
ISDN D-channel
E-CCIS Signal Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
ISDN B-channel
Sub Address: 9803
Sub Address: 9802
Sub Address: 9801
Sub Address: 9800
RT20
RT20
RT20
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
TK3
TK2
TK1
TK19
TK18
TK17
TK16
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
RT10
RT10
TK2
TK1
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
DID Number for incoming calls from an E-CCIS line:
0471-81-3500
DID Number for incoming calls from an alternate route: 0471-81-3600
Data assignment procedure related to the E-CCIS line is shown below.
STEP 1: ARTD - RT20 CDN 45 A/D: 0 (Voice information is transmitted)
CDN 49 TRKS: 0 (Select the trunk (CIC No.) in ascending order)
CDN 66 DC: 4
RT120 CDN 66 DC: 4
Note: The same value in “DC” assigned for ISDN B channel must be programmed to both E-CCIS Signal and
Speech route (RT10-CDN66 DC: 4).
STEP 2: ARTI - RT20 ECCIS:
ECCISTM:
1 (E-CCIS Route)
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB:
ECCISTD:
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (Addressing information: Sub Address)
RT120 ECCIS:
1 (E-CCIS Route)
ECCISTM :
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB:
ECCISTD:
3 (Release timer: 1 minute)
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (Addressing information: Sub Address)
CHAPTER 6
Page 226
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
STEP 3: AEVT - RT20 TK1 DESTINATION: 9800 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813500 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245600 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
TK2 DESTINATION: 9801 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813500 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245600 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
TK3 DESTINATION: 9802 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813500 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245600 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
RT120 TK1 DESTINATION: 9803 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813500 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245600 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
OPR: 20 (OPR number forRT20 specified in the ACBC command)
RA: 0 (RA number for RT20 specified in the ACBC command)
STEP 4: AVTC - TN:1
STN: 3500 (DID Number or Converted Number generated by ACDD command)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 227
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
The following data is assigned for route advance using Remote Access to System.
STEP 5: AOPR - TDPTN: 0
OPR: 15
RA: 1
E: 0
RT: 10
SKIP: 0
PNL: 30
OVFT: 1
PRSC: 0
STEP 6: AADC - PNL:30
DC: 0891246000*(Calling number for Remote Access to System plus*)
STEP 7: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 43, Bit 0:1 (Forced Account Code Dialing is not required for Remote
Access to System)
STEP 8: ARTD - For the alternate incoming route, assign CDN 38 (FA) as 1.
STEP 9: ARAC - ICTN: 1
ACC: 3600 (DID Number or Converted Number generated by ACDD command)
TN: 1
CHAPTER 6
Page 228
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDN TRANSPORT
Example of port allocation when using DID Number as addressing information
•
24PRT
RT110 TK1
RT120 TK1
ISDN D-channel
E-CCIS Signal Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
E-CCIS Speech Channel
ISDN B-channel
DID Number:0471-81-3503
DID Number:0471-81-3502
DID Number:0471-81-3501
DID Number:0471-81-3500
RT20
RT20
RT20
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
TK3
TK2
TK1
TK19
TK18
TK17
TK16
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
RT10
RT10
TK2
TK1
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
Data assignment procedure related to the E-CCIS line is shown below.
STEP 10: ARTD - RT20 CDN 45 (A/D):
CDN 66 (DC):
0
4
RT120 CDN 66 (DC):
4
STEP 11: ARTI - RT20 CDN 31 (ECCIS):
CDN 32 (ECCISTM) :
1 (E-CCIS Route)
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
CDN 33 (ECCISOB) :
CDN 34 (ECCISIB) :
CDN 36 (ECCISTD) :
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
0 (Addressing information: Called DID Number)
RT120 CDN 31 (ECCIS):
CDN 32 (ECCISTM) :
CDN 33 (ECCISOB) :
CDN 34 (ECCISIB) :
CDN 36 (ECCISTD) :
1 (E-CCIS Route)
3 (Release timer: 1 minute)
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
0 (Addressing information: Called DID Number)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 229
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - ISDNTRANSPORT
STEP 12: AEVT - RT20 TK1 DESTINATION: 3500 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813500 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245600 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
TK2 DESTINATION: 3501 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813501 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245601 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
TK3 DESTINATION: 3502 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813502 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245602 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
RT120 TK1 DESTINATION: 3503 (E-CCIS trunk identification number)
CALLING: 0471813503 (DID number for incoming call)
CALLED: 0891245603 (DID number for outgoing call)
C_RT: 120 (CCIS Signal Route Number)
C_TK: 1 (CCIS Signal Trunk Number)
VRY: 1 (Verification of Connection: Required)
OPR: 20 (OPR number forRT20 specified in the ACBC command)
RA: 0 (RA number for RT20 specified in the ACBC command)
STEP 13: AVTC - TN: 1
STN: 3500
STN: 3501 DID Number or Converted Number generated by ACDD command
STN: 3502
STN: 3503
CHAPTER 6
Page 230
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
E-24 EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
1. General Description
This feature provides VIRTUAL TIE LINE for each event such as call origination and MCI message
transmission. Inter-PBX link for this feature is established on B-channels of the private ISDN line using CCIS
No. 7 signaling protocol. For addressing a specific terminal, Called Sub Address or Called DID Number is used
depending on the network configuration.
2. Operating Procedure
None.
3. Service Conditions
1. The ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunk is used for this feature.
2. ETS 300 172 or ISO/IEC 11572 is available as ISDN interface for this service.
3. E-CCIS signal channel assignment is not necessary when activating via the private ISDN line because
E-CCIS line is controlled by D-channel of ISDN.
4. This feature is activated between two PBXs directly connected to each other. Therefore, this feature is not
available for the using tandem office.
5. Since this feature uses the B-channel for ISDN as the speech line, the speech line is not established when
all B-channels are busy.
6. When using Called Sub Address as addressing information:
(a) Sub Address-Addressing must be available in the ISDN network.
(b) different DID Numbers must be assigned to the ISDN line, the E-CCIS line.
For the E-CCIS line, DID Number is required for each D-channel.
(c) Sub Address assigned to the E-CCIS trunk must be common to both offices.
7. When using Called DID Number as addressing information:
(a) a different DID Number is required for each channel of the E-CCIS line.
(b) when multiple routes are assigned for the terminating office, call termination to an E-CCIS trunk must
not be allowed except when DID Number assigned to the trunk is dialed.
(c) different DID Numbers must be assigned to the ISDN line and the E-CCIS line. For the E-CCIS line,
DID Number is required by for each D-channel.
8. Each channel used for a E-CCIS line must be controlled by a single D-channel (i.e. Each channel must be
assigned to a single ISDN line).
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 231
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
9. Billing information
(a) OG billing and IC billing data should be set for each route via theARTI command.
(b) Trunk identification number assigned at DESTINATION of the AEVT command is output to the
SDMR text in place of a station number.
(c) Billing information on E-CCIS line does not include Access Code or Converted Number (ASYD-
SYS1 Index 32, bit 5/Index 34, bit 5/Index 62, bit 2=0).
10. Peg Count service for E-CCIS line (ETS 300 172 or ISO/IEC 11572) is activated for ISDN route setting
Virtual Tie Line data.
(Peg Count for ISDN line includes the route for E-CCIS line)
11. This service is established when no E-CCIS line is established or the call is originated even if the all
channels are busy.
12. The release timer is activated when the CCIS call is disconnected.
13. The following features are available for the E-CCIS line:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Asynchronous Data Switching [A-44] Note
Attendant Camp-On with Tone Indication – CCIS [A-45]
Attendant-Controlled Conference – CCIS [A-46]
Automatic Recall – CCIS [A-71]
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) – CCIS [A-87]
Busy Verification – CCIS [B-9]
Brokerage Hotline – CCIS [B-10]
Call Back – CCIS [C-44]
Call Forwarding – All Calls – CCIS [C-45]
Call Forwarding – Busy Line – CCIS [C-46]
Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer – CCIS [C-47]
Call Forwarding – Intercept – CCIS [C-48]
Call Forwarding – Override – CCIS [C-49]
Call Transfer – All Calls – CCIS [C-50]
Called Station Status Display – CCIS [C-51]
Calling/Called Number Display – CCIS [C-52]
Call Processing Indication – CCIS [C-53]
Call Transfer – Attendant – CCIS [C-54]
Consultation Hold – All Calls – CCIS [C-58]
Call Forwarding Assignment – Attendant – CCIS [C-94]
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark – CCIS [D-70]
Data Communication – CCIS [D-41] Note
Data Interface – Automatic Answer – CCIS [D-65] Note
Data Line Security – CCIS [D-66] Note
Data Line Privacy – CCIS [D-67] Note
Data Privacy on Demand – CCIS [D-68] Note
Data Transparency – CCIS [D-69] Note
Dial Access to Attendant – CCIS [D-71]
Digital Display – Station – CCIS [D-72]
CHAPTER 6
Page 232
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital Display – Trunk – CCIS [D-73]
Direct-In Termination – CCIS [D-74]
Distinctive Ringing – CCIS [D-75]
term
Do Not Disturb – D
– CCIS [D-76D]
Data Hotline – CCIS [D-86] Note
Dialed Number Display – Recall – CCIS [D-91]
term
Dual Hold D
– CCIS [D-93D]
Executive Right-of-Way – CCIS [E-8]
Elapsed Time Display – CCIS [E-9]
E-911 ANI Unified Number of Digits – CCIS [E-20]
Flexible Numbering of Stations – CCIS [F-12]
term
Hands-Free Answerback – D
House Phone – CCIS [H-11]
Hotline – CCIS [H-12]
– CCIS [H-10D]
Incoming Call Identification – CCIS [I-16]
Individual Attendant Access – CCIS [I-17]
Inter-Position Transfer – CCIS [I-18]
Individual Trunk Access – CCIS [I-19]
Look Ahead Routing – CCIS [L-25]
LDN Night Connection – CCIS [L-29]
Message Reminder – CCIS [M-34]
term
Message Reminder – D
– CCIS [M-34D]
Message Waiting Lamp Setting – Attendant – CCIS [M-35]
Message Waiting Lamp Setting – Station – CCIS [M-36]
Miscellaneous Trunk Access – CCIS [M-37]
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction – CCIS [M-38]
Modem Pooling – CCIS [M-39] Note
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls – CCIS [M-40]
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line – CCIS [M-41]
Multiple Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer – CCIS [M-42]
Multiple Console Operation – CCIS [M-43]
Message Center Interface – CCIS [M-67]
Night Connection – Fixed – CCIS [N-15]
Night Connection – Flexible – CCIS [N-16]
Name Display – System – CCIS [N-37]
Off-Hook Queuing – CCIS [O-11]
Outgoing Trunk Queuing – CCIS [O-12]
Paging Access – CCIS [P-28]
Restriction from Outgoing Calls – CCIS [R-22]
Serial Call – CCIS [S-52]
term
Service Display – D
– CCIS [S-53D]
Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission – CCIS [S-54]
Single-Digit Station Calling – CCIS [S-55]
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 233
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Station Controlled Conference – CCIS [S-56]
Station-to-Station Calling – CCIS [S-57]
Station-to-Station Calling – Operator Assistance – CCIS [S-58]
Step Call – CCIS [S-59]
Synchronous Data Switching – CCIS [S-60]
Supervisory Call – CCIS [S-73]
Toll Restriction – 3/6-Digit – CCIS [T-26]
Trunk Answer from Any Station – CCIS [T-27]
Uniform Numbering Plan – CCIS [U-5]
Voice Call – CCIS [V-7]
Note: When A/D=1 (Digital) is assigned by CDN45, ARTD, this feature is available.
4. Programming
STEP 2: Assign CCIS No.7 related data.
Note: Assign the LEN of the DCH for controlling E-CCIS route at the CCH parameter of the ACSC command.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the Bearer Capability for the speech channels of the E-CCIS line.
CDN45 A/D: 0/1= Analog (Bearer Capability: Speech)/Digital (Bearer Capability:
Unrestricted Digital)
CDN49 TRKS: 0/1= select the trunk in ascending order/descending order (CIC No. is
programmed by the ACSC command)
CHAPTER 6
Page 234
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
STEP 4: ARTI - Assign the following data for the E-CCIS route.
JECCIS (Common use with E-CCIS RT):1
ECCISTIM: Release Timer for the E-CCIS line
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
3 minutes (Default)
15 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
1 hour
10-13: Not used
14:
15:
Immediately after call completion
Not released
ECCISOB: OG Billing for E-CCIS Line
0/1=Not required/Required.
ECCISIB:
IC Billing for E-CCIS Line
0/1=Not required/Required.
ECCISTD: Addressing information used in E-CCIS
0/1=Called DID Number/Called Sub Address.
ECCIS2 (E-CCIS System): 1=Common Channel System
STEP 5: AEVT - Assign the virtual tie line data for E-CCIS.
FUNC:
RT:
1
Route Number
TK:
Fixed “0”
TYPE:
3 (Common Channel System)
DESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits)
CALLING:
CALLED:
ISDN_RT:
VRY:
Calling Number (Max. 24 digits)
Called Number (Max. 24 digits)
ISDN Route Number
Verification of Connection Note
0/1=Not required/Required
2
FUNC:
PC:
RT:
Terminating Point Code
E-CCIS Route Number
Note: When Verification of Connection is in service, if the last four digits of the received number is not equal to
those of Called Number, the connection is not established.
STEP 6: AVTC - Assign Virtual Tie Line Number for the E-CCIS route.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 235
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
Examples of Data Assignment for the E-CCIS line
•
Example of port allocation when using Called Sub Address as addressing information
24PRT
RT110 TK1
ISDN D-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
TK23
TK22
TK21
TK20
TK19
TK18
TK17
TK16
RT10
RT10
TK2
TK1
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
DID Number for incoming calls from an E-CCIS line:
8-26-3500
Data assignment procedure related to the E-CCIS line is shown below.
E-CCIS speech line for the office A (PC=2) → RT20
E-CCIS speech line for the office B (PC=3) → RT30
STEP 1: ARTD - Office A
RT20
CDN 45 (A/D):
CDN 49 (TRKS):
0 (Bearer capability: speech)
0
- Office B
RT30
CDN 45 (A/D):
CDN 49 (TRKS):
0 (Bearer capability: speech)
0
STEP 2: ARTI - RT10
JECCIS:
1 (common use with E-CCIS RT)
- Office A
RT20
ECCISTM:
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB :
ECCISTD:
ECCIS2:
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (Addressing information: Sub Address)
1 (Common channel system)
- Office B
RT30
ECISTM:
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
CHAPTER 6
Page 236
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (Addressing information: Sub Address)
1 (Common channel system)
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB :
ECCISTD:
ECCIS2:
STEP 3: AEVT - Office A
FUNC:
1
RT20
TK:
TYPE:
0 (fixed)
3 (Common channel system)
DESTINATION: 9800
CALLING:
CALLED:
ISDN_RT:
VRY:
8263500
81164500
10
1
FUNC:
2
PC:
2
RT:
20
- Office B
FUNC:
1
RT30
TK:
0 (fixed)
TYPE:
3 (Common channel system)
DESTINATION:
CALLING:
CALLED:
ISDN_RT:
VRY:
9801
8263500
8205500
10
1
FUNC:
2
PC:
RT:
3
30
STEP 4: AVTC - TN:1
STN: 3500 (DID number or Converted number generated by the ACDD command)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 237
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
•
Example of port allocation when using DID Number as addressing information
24PRT
RT110 TK1
ISDN D-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
RT10
TK23
TK22
TK21
TK20
TK19
TK18
TK17
TK16
RT10
RT10
TK2
TK1
ISDN B-channel
ISDN B-channel
[For Office A] DID Number for incoming calls from an E-CCIS line:
[For Office B] DID Number for incoming calls from an E-CCIS line:
8-26-3200
8-26-3300
Data assignment procedure related to the E-CCIS line is shown below.
E-CCIS speech line for the office A (PC=2) → RT20
E-CCIS speech line for the office B (PC=3) → RT30
STEP 5: ARTD - Office A
RT20
CDN 45 (A/D):
CDN 49 (TRKS):
0 (Bearer capability: speech)
0
- Office B
RT30
CDN 45 (A/D):
CDN 49 (TRKS):
0 (Bearer capability: speech)
0
STEP 6: ARTI - RT10
JECCIS:
1 (common use with E-CCIS RT)
- Office A
RT20
ECISTM:
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB :
ECCISTD:
ECCIS2:
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
0 (Addressing information: DID number)
1 (Common channel system)
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 238
Revision 1.0
EVENT BASED CCIS - Q-SIGTRANSPORT
- Office B
RT30
ECISTM:
ECCISOB:
ECCISIB :
ECCISTD:
ECCIS2:
5 (Release timer: 5 minutes)
1 (OG billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
1 (IC billing for the E-CCIS line is required)
0 (Addressing information: DID number)
1 (Common channel system)
STEP 7: AEVT - Office A
FUNC:
1
RT20
TK:
TYPE:
0 (fixed)
3 (Common channel system)
DESTINATION: 3200
CALLING:
CALLED:
ISDN_RT:
VRY:
8263200
81164500
10
1
FUNC:
2
PC:
2
RT:
20
- Office B
FUNC:
1
RT30
TK:
TYPE:
0 (fixed)
3 (Common channel system)
DESTINATION: 3300
CALLING:
CALLED:
ISDN_RT:
VRY:
8263300
8205500
10
1
FUNC:
2
PC:
RT:
3
30
STEP 8: AVTC - TN:1
STN: 3200 (DID number or Converted number generated by the ACDD command)
STN: 3300 (DID number or Converted number generated by the ACDD command)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 239
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
C-152 CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
1. General Description
This feature allows a calling station to set Inter-Office Call Back when the called station does not answer. This
feature conforms to ETS 300 366. CCNR conforming to IS-13870 is available since Series 7400 software.
2. Operating Procedure
To set CCNR:
1. Station A places a call to Station B and receives Ring Back Tone; Station B does not answer.
2. While hearing Ring Back Tone, Station A presses the switchhook flash button and dials the access code or
presses the feature key for setting CCNR; Station A receives Service Set Tone.
3. Station A goes on-hook and waits for call back from Station B. Station B lifts the handset and handles
another call.
4. Station B goes on-hook; Station A rings.
5. Station A answers; Station B is automatically recalled.
6. Station B answers; Station A and Station B are connected.
To cancel CCNR:
1. Station A lifts the handset while the CCNR service is set; Station A hears Dial Tone.
2. Station A dials the access code or presses the function key for canceling CCNR; Station A hears Service Set
Tone.
3. Station A replaces the handset.
Note: Operating procedure varies depending on the specifications of the station since ETS 300 306/IS-13870
protocol does not regulate.
3. Service Conditions
1. CCNR is available when an end-to-end link is established via Q-SIG interface (ETS 300 172).
2. The transfer rate is 64 kbps. Bearer Capabilities are as follows:
•
•
•
Speech
3.1 kHz audio
7 kHz audio
3. Multiple CCNR features cannot be set for a single station.
term
4. CCNR is available for the D
terminal).
or an analog station (i.e. not available for Attendant Console or ISDN
5. When the called station becomes idle while the calling station is in conversation, the calling station is
recalled after the conversation ends.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 240
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
6. When the called station number is Pilot Number of Station Hunting Group, CCNR is set to the terminated
station.
7. When a Call Forwarding feature is activated at the called station, note the following conditions:
•
•
If Call Forwarding - All Calls is activated, CCNR is not available.
If Call Forwarding - Busy Line or Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer is activated, CCNR is set to the
forwarded station.
•
If Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer is activated and the forwarded station is busy, CCNR is not
available.
8. CCNR is not available while one of the following features is activated:
•
•
•
•
•
Call Back
Call Back - CCIS
Call Waiting
Call Hold
ATT Camp On (Called side)
9. CCNR is canceled when:
•
•
•
•
Cancel Timer for CCNR expires.
All the trunks for recalling are busy.
The system recalls the calling station in lockout or make-busy state.
The called station is abnormally released (ex. the handset remains off-hook) and turned into lockout
state.
10. CCNR conforming to IS-13870 is available when an end-to-end link is established via IS-11572 interface
or when the tandem connection of Q-SIG and IS-11572 link is established (Not available for the signaling
method other than Q-SIG and IS-11572).
11. The transfer rate is 64kbps. Bearer Capabilities are as follows:
•
•
- Speech
- 3.1 kHz audio
Note: For more details of CCNR feature regulated by protocol, see the corresponding manual.
term
12. CCNR is available for the D
nor ISDN terminal).
or an analog station (i.e. not available for PS terminal, Attendant Console
13. CCNR is available while the called party is ringing in two-party connection between calling and called party.
14. CCNR is not available while the calling/called station is in one of the following conditions:
(a) Calling Station
•
•
•
•
•
the station sets Call Back or Call Back is set to the station
the station sets Call Back-CCIS or Call Back-CCIS is set to the station
the station uses Call Hold
the station sets Call Waiting service
the station is restricted this feature
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 241
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
(b) Called Station
•
•
•
•
•
the station is in lockout state or make-busy state
the station sets Call Back or Call Back is set to the station
the station sets Call Back-CCIS or Call Back-CCIS is set to the station
the station uses Call Hold
the station sets Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line (providing that Call Forwarding service is
successful)
•
•
•
Attendant Camp on with Tone Indication is set to the station
the station sets Call Waiting service
the station is restricted this feature
15. CCNR is canceled when:
(a) Automatic Cancel Timer for CCNR expires (ASYD, System data 1, Index 71, b0-b3 decides the timer
and b7 makes the timer effective).
* Automatic Cancel for Call Back is applied to this feature also.
(b) No Answer Timer (calling station does not answer the CCNR recall) expires (ASYD, System Data 1,
Index 139. Default data is 30 seconds).
(c) The system recalls the calling station in lockout or make-busy state (CCNR is effective when the
system recalls after lockout state or make-busy state is recovered).
(d) All trunks for recalling are busy when the system recalls the calling station.
(e) The called station is abnormally released (ex. The handset remains off-hook) and turned into lockout
state.
(f) The operating station is restricted incoming calls at the time of recall.
16. The single station cannot set multiple CCNR services and multiple CCNR services cannot be set to the
single station.
A maximum number of CCNR to be set simultaneously per LP =
480 – (no. of ISDN call to be handled + no. of already set CCBS and CCNR service Note)
Note: Both CCBS and CCNR services conforming to ETS300 366 and IS-13870.
17. When the called station becomes idle while the calling station is in conversation, the system recalls the
calling station after the conversation ends.
18. If the fault occurs at IS-11572 data link;
(a) If the fault occurs when the calling station is operating to set CCNR, CCNR service cannot be set.
(b) If the fault occurs when the calling station is operating to cancel CCNR, CCNR is canceled at the side
of operating station but not canceled at the side of called station to be set since the cancel message is
not sent to the station.
(c) If the fault occurs when informing the calling station that the called station becomes idle, CCNR is
canceled at the side of called station, but not canceled at the side of calling station since the message
is not sent to the station.
(d) If the fault occurs when the calling station answers the recall (CCNR call), CCNR is canceled at the
side of the calling station but not canceled at the side of the called station since the message is not sent
to the station.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 242
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
19. The conditions of alternate routing are as follows.
(a) If the data link fault occurs when the station is operating to set CCNR, the message for service set is
sent using alternate route providing that the interface is Q-SIG/IS-11572.
(b) The same route is used for sending service set message and recall (the other route cannot be used).
Therefore, recall is not completed since all trunks (B-channel) of the corresponding route are busy, and
the system processes the call as follows.
•
All B-channel trunks at the system of an calling station are busy:
cancel CCNR and send the busy tone to the calling station.
•
All B-channel trunks at the mediate system are busy:
send the message of CCNR recall fault to the calling station and the message of CCNR cancel to
the called station.
20. The description below are interactions between CCNR and Call Forwarding service (All Calls, Busy Line,
Don’t Answer).
(a) When setting CCNR to the station which is set C.F. service, the time of setting CCNR decides whether
the service is set or not.
C.F. - All Calls
C.F. - Busy Line
C.F. - Don’t Answer
C.F. is incomplete
-
CCNR is set to the for- CCNR is set to the for-
warding station (called warding station (called
C.F. is not applicable (the condition
for making C.F. complete is not agreed)
(before) C.F. is activated
station)
(after) C.F. is complete
Not Available
Not Available
CCNR is set to the for-
warding station (called
Note 1: When the calling station recalls the station which is set CCNR service after answering CCNR recall,
No Answer Timer time out is effective. If the timer expires, the recall is forwarded to the destination.
Note 2: The station to be set CCNR is not changed if C.F. - Don’t Answer service is canceled after CCNR
service set.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 243
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
CCNR call is terminated to Station A (the call is not forwarded to Station D).
C.F. service is set from Station A
Station D
Station C
IS-11572
IS-11572
CCNR is set from Station A.
Station A
Station B
Recall for CCNR
LEGEND
: direction of CCNR call
: direction of C.F. service
(b) When Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line/Don’t Answer is set on a calling station, the system
recalls the calling party.
(c) When a called station is set Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line/Don’t Answer after CCBS service
is set to the station, a calling station recalls the called station (forwarding station). As for a called
station to be set Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer, the destination station is recalled from the calling
station if No Answer Timer expires.
21. When the called station is Station Hunting Group member, CCNR is set to the terminated station. If the
terminated station is busy, CCNR cannot be set.
22. Sub Address-Addressing is not used with CCNR.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 244
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR)
4. Programming
Assign the basic data for establishing the Q-SIG or the IS-11572 (available to operate CCNR conforming to
IS-13870 since Series 7400 Release 8 software) line referring to “IS-11572 (Layer 3 specifications for inter-
PBX signalling protocol)” or “Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call-ETSI Version” in this chapter.
STEP 1: ASYD -System Data 1, Index 17, bit 0. Hooking service while hearing Ring Back Tone is available
for single line stations? 0/1 = No/Yes.
System Data 1, Index 71, bits 0 through 3. Assign the timer value of Cancel Timer for
CCNR.
System Data 1, Index 71, bit 7. Automatic Cancel of CCNR. 0/1 = Out/In Service.
System Data 2, Index 4, bit 0. CCNR and OG Trunk Queuing Access Code. 0/1 =
Separate/Common.
System Data 3, Index 7. Assign Ringer Pattern for Recalling.
STEP 2: ANPD -Reserve a number level for setting/canceling CCNR.
STEP 3: ASPA -Assign an access code for setting/canceling CCNR.
•
For setting CCNR
CI = H
SRV = SSC
SID = 3 (Call Back; Entry)
•
For canceling CCNR
CI = N
SRV = SSC
SID = 6 (Call Back; Cancel)
STEP 4: Assign Service Feature Class that allows SFI = 2 (Call Back) to the stations allowed this service.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 245
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
C-148 CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
1. General Description
This feature allows an Inter-Office Call Back when the calling station and the called station respectively belong
to a different PBX in a Q-SIG network. This feature conforms to ETS 300 366.
Since the Series 7400 software program, CCBS conforming to IS-13870 is also available.
2. Operating Procedure
To set CCBS:
[When using the access code]
1. Station A and Station B are in station-to-station connection.
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
2. Station C dials the number for Station B; Station C receives Busy Tone.
BT
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
3. Station C presses the switchhook or dials the last digit of the number for Station B; Station C receives
Special Dial Tone.
SPDT
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
CHAPTER 6
Page 246
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
4. Station C dials the access code for CCBS; Station C receives Service Set Tone and hangs up.
SST
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
5. Both Stations A and B hang up (i.e. Station B becomes idle); Station C rings.
RG
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
6. Station C answers and receives Ring Back Tone; Station B rings.
RG
RBT
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
7. Station B answers; Stations C and B are connected.
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
Station B
When using line/feature key:
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 247
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
1. Station A and Station B are in station-to-station connection.
Station A
Station B
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
2. Station C dials the number for Station B; Station C receives Busy Tone.
BT
Station A
Station B
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
3. Station C presses the feature key for CCBS; Station C receives Service Set Tone and hangs up.
SST
Station A
Station B
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
CHAPTER 6
Page 248
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
4. Both stations A and B hang up (i.e. Station B becomes idle); Station C rings.
RG
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
Station A
Station B
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
5. Station C answers and receives Ring Back Tone; Station B rings.
RG
RBT
Station A
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
Station B
6. Station B answers; Station B and Station C are connected.
Station A
Station B
Q-SIG/
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
IS-11572
Station C
[Node A]
[Node B]
[Node C]
To cancel CCBS:
1. Station A lifts the handset while the CCBS service is set; Station A hears Dial Tone.
2. Station A dials the access code or presses the function key for canceling CCBS; Station A hears Service Set
Tone.
3. Station A replaces the handset.
Note: Operating procedure varies depending on the specifications of the station since ETS 300 306/IS-13870
protocol does not regulate.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 249
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
3. Service Conditions
1. CCBS is available when an end-to-end link is established via Q-SIG interface (ETS 300 172).
2. The transfer rate is 64 kbps. Bearer Capabilities are as follows:
– Speech
– 3.1 kHz audio
– 7 kHz audio
3. Multiple CCBS features cannot be set for a single station.
term
4. CCBS is available for the D
or an analog station (Attendant Console and ISDN terminal cannot be used).
5. When the called station number is Pilot Number of Station Hunting Group, CCBS is set to the terminated
station.
6. When Call Forwarding – All Calls is activated at the called station, CCBS is set to the forwarded station.
7. When Call Forwarding – Busy Line is activated at the called station and the forwarded station is also busy,
CCBS is set to the called station.
8. CCBS is not available while one of the following features is activated:
•
•
•
•
•
Call Back
Call Back – CCIS
Call Waiting
Call Hold
ATT Camp On (Called side)
9. CCBS is canceled when:
•
•
•
•
Cancel Timer for CCBS expires.
All the trunks for recalling are busy.
The system recalls the calling station in lockout or make busy state.
The called station is abnormally released (ex. the handset remains off-hook) and turned into lockout
state.
10. CCBS conforming to IS-13870 is available when an end-to-end link is established via IS-11572 interface or
when the tandem connection of Q-SIG and IS-11572 link is established (Not available for the signaling
method other than Q-SIG and IS-11572).
11. The transfer rate is 64 kbps. Bearer Capabilities are as follows:
- Speech
- 3.1 kHz audio
Note: For more details about the CCBS feature regulated by protocol, see the corresponding manual.
term
12. CCBS is available for the D
nor ISDN terminal).
or an analog station (i.e. not available for PS terminal, Attendant Console
13. CCBS can be set only when the called station is in two-party connection or busy condition and the call is
not completed for the called user busy (fault cause is #17).
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 250
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
14. CCBS is not available while the calling and called station is in one of the following conditions:
(a) Calling Station
•
•
•
•
•
the station sets Call Back or Call Back is set to the station
the station sets Call Back-CCIS or Call Back-CCIS is set to the station
the station uses Call Hold
the station sets Call Waiting service
the station is restricted this feature
(b) Called Station
•
•
•
•
•
the station is in lockout state or make-busy state.
the station sets Call Back or Call Back is set to the station
the station sets Call Back-CCIS or Call Back-CCIS is set to the station
the station uses Call Hold
the station sets Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line (providing that these C.F. services are
complete)
•
•
•
Attendant Camp on with Tone Indication is set to the station
the station sets Call Waiting service
the station is restricted this feature
15. CCBS is canceled when:
(a) Automatic Cancel Timer for CCNR expires (ASYD, System data 1, Index 71, b0-b3 decides the timer
and b7 makes the timer effective).
* Automatic Cancel for Call Back is applied to this feature also.
(b) No Answer Timer (calling station does not answer the CCBS recall) expires (ASYD, System Data 1,
Index 139. Default data is 30 seconds).
(c) The system recalls the calling station in lockout or make-busy state (CCNR is effective when the
calling station is called after lockout state or make-busy state is recovered).
(d) All trunks for recalling are busy at the time of recall.
(e) The called station is abnormally released (ex. The handset remains off-hook) and turned into lockout
state.
(f) The calling station (operating station) is restricted incoming calls at the time of recall.
16. The single station cannot set multiple CCBS services and multiple CCBS services cannot be set to the single
station.
A maximum number of CCBS to be set simultaneously per LP =
480 – (no. of ISDN call to be handled + no. of already set CCBS and CCNR service Note)
Note: Both CCBS and CCNR services conforming to ETS300 366 and IS-13870.
17. When the called station becomes idle while the calling station is in conversation, the system recalls the
calling station after the conversation ends.
18. Sub Address-Addressing is not used with CCBS.
19. If the fault occurs at IS-11572 data link when;
(a) If the fault occurs when the calling station is operating to set CCBS, CCBS service cannot be set.
(b) If the fault occurs when the calling station is operating to cancel CCBS, CCBS is canceled at the side
of operating station but not canceled at the side of called station since the cancel message is not sent
to the station.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 251
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
(c) If the fault occurs when informing the calling station that the called station becomes idle, CCBS is
canceled at the side of station to be set, but not canceled at the side of calling station since the message
is not sent to the station.
(d) If the fault occurs when the calling station answers the recall (CCBS call), CCBS is canceled at the
side of the calling station but not canceled at the side of the called station since the message is not sent
to the station.
20. The conditions of alternate routing are as follows.
(a) If the data link fault occurs when the station is operating to set CCBS, the message for service set is
sent using alternate route providing that the interface is Q-SIG/IS-11572.
(b) The same route is used for sending service set message and recall (the other route cannot be used).
Therefore, recall is not completed since all trunks (B-channel) of the corresponding route are busy, the
system processes the call as follows.
•
All B-channel trunks at the system of an calling station are busy:
cancel CCBS and send the busy tone to the calling station.
•
All B-channel trunks at the mediate system are busy :
send the message of CCBS recall fault to the calling station and the message of CCBS cancel to the
called station.
21. The description below are interactions between CCBS and Call Forwarding service (All Calls, Busy Line,
Don’t Answer).
(a) When setting CCBS to the station which is set C.F. service, the time of setting CCBS decides whether
the service is set or not.
C.F. - All Calls C.F. - Busy Line
C.F. - Don’t Answer
C.F. is incomplete
-
-
CCBS is set to the forward-
ing station (called station)
C.F. is not applicable (the condition
for making C.F. complete is not agreed)
(before) C.F. is activated
(after) C.F. is complete
Not Available Not Available
-
Note 1: When the calling station recalls the station which is set CCBS service after answering CCBS recall, No
Answer Timer time out is effective. If the timer expires, the recall is forwarded to the destination.
Note 2: The station to be set CCBS is not changed after CCBS service set even if C.F. - Don’t Answer service
is canceled.
(b) When Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line/Don’t Answer is set on a calling station, the system
recalls the calling party.
(c) When a called station is set Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line/Don’t Answer after CCBS service
is set to the station, a calling station recalls the called station (forwarding station). As for a called
station to be set Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer, the destination station is recalled from the calling
station if No Answer Timer expires.
4. Programming
Assign the basic data for establishing the Q-SIG or the IS-11572 (since Series 7400 software) line referring to
“IS-11572 (Layer 3 specifications for inter-PBX signaling protocol)” or “Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call-
ETSI Version” in this chapter.
CHAPTER 6
Page 252
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)
STEP 1: ARTD - Assign the following CDN data for the B channel route.
CDN43(BT): 1
STEP 2: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 68, bit 0. Operating method for busy station service.
0/1 = SHF + Access Code/Last Digit + Access Code.
System Data 1, Index 71, bits 0 through 3. Assign the timer value of Cancel Timer for
CCBS.
System Data 1, Index 71, bit 7. Automatic Cancel for CCBS. 0/1 = Out/In Service.
System Data 2, Index 4, bit 0. CCBS and OG Trunk Queuing Access Code. 0/1 = Separate/
Common.
System Data 3, Index 7. Assign Ringer Pattern for Recalling.
STEP 3: ANPD - Reserve a number level for setting/canceling CCBS.
STEP 4: ASPA - Assign an access code for setting/canceling CCBS.
•
For setting CCBS
CI = B
SRV = SSC
SID = 3 (Call Back; Entry)
•
For canceling CCBS
CI = N
SRV = SSC
SID = 6 (Call Back; Cancel)
STEP 5: ASFC - Assign Service Feature Class that allows SFI = 2 (Call Back) to the stations allowed this
service.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 253
Revision 1.0
CNIP/CONP
C-153 CNIP/CONP
1. General Description
In between Q-SIG networks, this feature allows calling or called party's information, called Name ID, to be
term
displayed on the D
networks.
LCD. This feature conforms to ETS 300 238. This feature is available for IS-11572
•
•
Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP): Calling party's information (Name ID) is displayed on
term
the called party's D
LCD.
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP): Called party's information (Name ID) is displayed
term
on the calling party's D
LCD.
This feature is also available when interworking with a CCIS interface.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Service Conditions
1. This service is not available when:
•
•
a tandem office is not provided with this feature or Name Display - System - CCIS [N-37].
a call is routed through a signaling interface other than Q-SIG or CCIS.
2. The routes to the offices not provided with this feature must be separated from the routes to the offices
provided with this feature.
term
3. While hearing Ring Back Tone, Name ID of the called party is displayed on the calling party's D
LCD.
Note that the display is not changed even if the call is transferred using such features as CALL
FORWARDING - ALL CALLS.
4. When a call is transferred to another office using a forwarding feature such as CALL FORWARDING - ALL
term
CALLS - OUTSIDE, Name ID of the terminated station is displayed on the calling party's D
LCD.
5. Even if the called party is in busy or lockout state, the called party's Name ID is displayed on the calling
term
party's D
LCD. However, when the called party is in Do Not Disturb state, Name ID is not displayed.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 254
Revision 1.0
CNIP/CONP
6. When a call is transferred using Consultation Hold and Voice Call, Name ID of the calling party is not
term
displayed on the transferred party's D
LCD.
7. This service cannot be used in conjunction with the ISDN Information Transfer service.
8. The transfer rate is 64 kbps. Bearer Capabilities are as follows:
•
•
•
Speech
3.1 kHz audio
7 kHz audio
9. When Name ID is not assigned, the calling or called party's number is displayed.
10. When both 8-digit display and 16-digit display are used for this feature, the calling or called party's name is
displayed as shown in the table below.
ORIGINATING OFFICE
→TERMINATING OFFICE
CALLING PARTY'S NAME ID
DISPLAY
CALLED PARTY'S NAME ID DISPLAY
16 digits → 8 digits
Bottom Line: 16 digits
(Right 8 digits: Blank)
Top Line: 8 digits
(Front 8-character display)
8 digits → 16 digits
Top Line: 8 digits
(Front 8-character display)
Bottom Line: 16 digits
(Right 8 digits: Blank)
8 digits → 16 digits → 8 digits Top Line: 8 digits
Top Line: 8 digits
16 digits → 8 digits → 16 digits Bottom Line: 16 digits
Bottom Line: 16 digits
term
11. When 16-digit display is in service, MULTIPLE LINE OPERATION is not available for the D
.
term
term
12. When originating a call to a Q-SIG line using a D
called party.
sub line, Name ID of the D
sub line is sent to the
13. CONP is available only for Prime Line of the calling party.
14. The characters displayed by this service are English alphabets, numerals and symbols of JIS unit codes
conforming to ISO-8859-1.
term
15. This service is available only for the D
equipped with LCD.
16. This service does not support Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) conforming to
ETS 300 238.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 255
Revision 1.0
CNIP/CONP
4. Programming
Name ID is assigned by ANDD command on each station number basis.
STEP 1: ASYD - System Data 1, Index 78, Bit 3: Station Number Display with 8-Character Name
Display. 0/1: Out/In Service.
System Data 1, Index 78, Bit 5: (1) Name Display in service.
System Data 1, Index 79, Bit 6: (0) OAI/ACD in service.
System Data 1, Index 241, Bit 1: User's Information Display service. 0/1: 8-Digit Display
Service/16-Digit Display Service.
STEP 2: ARTD - Assign route class data for the Q-SIG trunk route.
BT (CDN=43): 1
DPLY (CDN=50): 1
CI (CDN=98): 0
IND (CDN=112): 1
5. Interactions
Name ID is available for the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Busy Line - CCIS
Call Forwarding - Don't Answer - CCIS
Step Call - CCIS
Call Pickup
Recalling of Call Hold
Answering of Call Park
Call Waiting
Termination from UCD Queuing
Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Off-Hook Queuing
Inter-Office Off-Hook Queuing
CHAPTER 6
Page 256
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
C-158 CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
1. General Description
This feature provides Call Forwarding service activated to be followed by IS-13873/ETS 300 257 protocol
(SS-CF). By using this feature, all incoming calls can be forwarded automatically after the destination was
programmed against the called party. Also, rerouting function is activated with SS-CF service.
The functions of this feature are as follows.
1. Call Forwarding-Supplementary Service
Example) The service activation procedures below are explained under this condition.
Station A: Calling Station
Station B: Called Station (Forwarding Station)
Station C: Forwarded Station
(a) Supplementary Service - Call Forwarding Unconditional (SS-CFU)
All incoming calls routed to the station are forwarded to the designated destination automatically.
(1) Station A originates a call to Station B.
(2) The call is forwarded to Station C.
(a) Supplementary Service - Call Forwarding Busy (SS-CFB)
When the called station is busy, an incoming call terminated at the station is forwarded to the
designated destination automatically.
When Station B is busy, the call is forwarded to Station C.
(b) Supplementary Service - Call Forwarding No Reply (SS-CFNR)
When the called station has not answered for a predetermined time, an incoming call terminated at the
station is forwarded to the designated destination automatically.
(1) When Station A originates a call to Station B (Station B is ringing).
(2) Since Station B has not answered for a predetermined time a call is forwarded to Station C.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 257
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
3. Rerouting Function
To select the most proper routing (prevent to keep holding the unnecessary line), the line from the calling
party to the forwarded destination is newly established when SS-CF service is successful. LCDs of stations
concerned with this service are shown below.
Example) SS-CFU is used in this example.
Station A:
Station B:
Station C:
Calling Party
Called Party (Forwarding Party)
Forwarded Party
1) Station A originates a call to Station B. LCD display on station A is “3001”.
CALL
Station A
(2001)
Station B
(3001)
Station C
(4001)
2) As the SS-CFU is activated, a new call is automatically originated from Station A to Station C and the
line used for Station A through Station C is reestablished. LCD display on Station A is “4001” and “2001”
is displayed on Station CÕs LCD.
NEWLY
ESTABLISHED LINK
DISCONNECTED
Station A
(2001)
Station B
(3001)
Station C
(4001)
: IS-11572 or Q-SIG
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 258
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
2. Operating Procedure
[Set the service]
The SS-CF service setting should not be duplicated. The following operations (either by the access code or by
the function/soft key) should be performed for each service.
Note: The CF-B and CF-NR can be set/cancelled at one time depending on the system data.
•
Using the access code
(1) Lift the handset; the dial tone is heard.
(2) Dial each access code for setting the corresponding Call Forwarding service; the special dial tone is
heard.
(3) Dial the destination’s number; the service set tone is heard.
(4) Replace the handset.
•
Using the function/soft key
(1) Lift the handset; the dial tone is heard.
(2) Press each function/soft key for setting the corresponding Call Forwarding service; the special dial
tone is heard.
(3) Dial the destination’s number; the service set tone is heard.
(4) Replace the handset.
[Cancel the service]
•
Using the access code
(1) Lift the handset; the dial tone is heard.
(2) Dial each access code for canceling the corresponding Call Forwarding service; the service set tone is
heard.
(3) Replace the handset.
•
Using the function/soft key
(1) Lift the handset; the dial tone is heard.
(2) Press each function/soft key for canceling the corresponding Call Forwarding service; the service set
tone is heard.
(3) Replace the handset.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 259
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
3. Service Conditions
Call Forwarding-Supplementary Service
1. The conditions for service set/cancel are the same as the that of CALL FORWARDING - ALL CALLS/
BUSY LINE/DON’T ANSWER. Refer to “Feature Programming Manual” for those conditions.
term
2. The allowable terminals for this service are D , the analog station, ISDN terminal, PCS, and the attendant
console.
3. This feature is available with IS-11572/ETS 300 172 interface.
4. This feature is restricted by the Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC in ASFC) that denies CALL
FORWARDING - BUSY LINE [C-2]/DON’T ANSWER [C-3]/ALL CALLS [C-5] provided in the business
system.
5. The name display for supplementary information is available with this feature if Name Identification
supplementary-services (IS-13868/ETS 300 238) is provided.
6. The conditions for the display, transmission, set or cancel of the name display function, the supplementary
service of this feature, are the same as one of Name ID function provided as the supplementary service of
IS-11572/Q-SIG. Refer to “CALLING NAME IDENTIFICATION (CNIP)/CONNECTED NAME
IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (CONP)”.
7. When the station is called back, the SS-CF service is not activated (The call is not forwarded to the
destination, but the call is terminated at the called station.)
8. When multiple SS-CF services are set;
•
•
Maximum number of time for Call Forwarding is five (depending on the system data).
The above-mentioned number is described on the number of time that service is continuously activated
through Q-SIG/IS-11572.
•
•
The number of time that Call Forwarding service is activated within the system is not included in the
above-mentioned number.
Call Forwarding is not activated after the service has been performed the pre programmed number of
times.
9. When the forwarded party or the forwarded trunk is busy;
SS-CFU: The call is forwarded. The caller hears the busy tone.
SS-CFB: The call is forwarded. The caller hears the busy tone.
SS-CFNR: The call is not forwarded. The call continues to be placed at the party to be set SS-CFNR to the
busy party.
10. When the forwarded destination is the calling party;
(For example, Station A originates a call to Station B and Station B is set the SS-CF service to forward a
call to Station A)
SS-CFU: The call is forwarded. The caller hears the busy tone.
SS-CFB: The call is not forwarded. The caller hears the busy tone.
SS-CFNR: The call is not forwarded. The call continues to be placed at the party programmed SS-CFNR
to the calling party.
11. When a forwarded party is set multiple SS-CF and its destination is the forwarding party (the number of
times for activating the service is not exceeded the preprogramming number);
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 260
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
Example 1) Station A originates a call to Station B, and Station B set to forward a call to Station C. Station
C is set a call to forward to Station B.
The call is terminated at the Station B after being forwarded to Station C.
Example 2) Station A originates a call to Station B, and Station B set to forward a call to Station C. Station
C is set a call to forward to Station D and then Station D set to Station B.
The call is terminated at the Station B after being forwarded to Station C and D.
12. When the service is used to be interworked with the interface except IS-11572 or Q-SIG, the displayed
number is as follows.
•
On the caller’s LCD, the display that indicates the connected party’s number will not be changed until
the forwarded destination answers the call (If using IS-11572 or Q-SIG interface, the display is
changed when the call is forwarded and the called party starts to ring). After the call is answered, the
display is changed from the caller number to the destination’s number.
•
On the destinations LCD, the display is the same as that of the forwarded station using CALL
FORWARDING service.
Rerouting Function
1. Rerouting function is available when:
(a) SS-CF service is available.
(b) Bearer Capability information of speech or 3.1 kHz audio is available for rerouting function
(Unrestricted digital data cannot be forwarded and the line is disconnected).
(c) Transmission speed rate is 64 kbps.
term
(d) The calling and called party are D
or analog station. (When one of those stations is ISDN terminal,
PS terminal, or Attendant Console, C.F. service is activated without rerouting function). As for the
forwarded station, any terminal is available for this service.
(e) Another service is activated on the calling party.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 261
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
2. Rerouting function is also available for the call in the example below.
Calling Station (Station A): Office Code = 80, Station no. = 1000
Called Station (Station B): Office Code = 82, Station no. = 3000
Destination Station (Station C): Office Code = 83, Station no. = 4000
C.F. is set to “83-4000”
Station B
3000
Station C
4000
: Q-SIG/IS-11572
: ACIS/CCIS
82
81
83
RT2
Station A
1000
80
RT1
[routing selection data to Office “83”]
1st choice RT is RT1
2nd choice RT is RT2
1) Station A originates a call to Station B through Office “81”. (the call is routed to Station B through ACIS/CCIS
and Q-SIG/IS-11572 line).
2) Since Station B is set Call Forwarding service, the call is forwarded to Station C.
3) New line from Office “81” to “83” is established for the call (RT1 is the first choice routing from Office “81” to
“83”). Rerouted line connection is Office “80” → Office “81” → Office “83”.
Note: ACIS/CCIS line (Office “80” to “81”) is not reestablished and Station COs number is not displayed on
the LCD of Station A belonging to Office “80”.
3. When interworking through FCCS link, rerouting function is activated with no restriction.
4. When station-to-station connection is established between a calling party and a called party, the called party
and a forwarded party, rerouting function is not activated (Station-to-station connection in a Fusion Network
is also applied to this condition).
5. When the selected route for forwarding a call (from the called station to the forwarded station) is other than
Q-SIG, IS-11572 line, Call Forwarding service is activated without rerouting function. See the figure below.
In this case, rerouting function is not activated.
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
ACIS/CCIS
81
82
83
Station A
(2000)
Station C
(4000)
Station B (3000)
Station A calls to Station B, which is set C.F. service to Station C.
The call is forwarded to Station C using the protocol other than Q-SIG/IS-11572.
CHAPTER 6
Page 262
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
6. When there is no route that supports Q-SIG, IS-11572 protocol in the route selection data from a calling
party to a called station, Call Forwarding service is activated without rerouting function.
In this example, since the Q-SIG, IS-11572 line cannot be selected for a route from Station A (calling
station) to Station C (forwarded station), rerouting function is not activated even if RT1 or RT2 is idle.
C.F. to Station C
Station B
Station C
4000
82
81
83
84
3000
Station A
RT1
RT2
CCIS
ACIS
: Q-SIG/IS-11572
: ACIS/CCIS
1000
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 263
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
7. Reestablished route is decided by the routing selection pattern data programmed at the office where the
calling party is accommodated or the gateway PBX office to the called station. Therefore, the improper route
or the route that is the same as before rerouting function may be selected depending on the office data.
For Examples 1) through 4), see the figure below.
C.F. to Station C
Station B
Station C
3000
82
81
83
84
2000
RT3
Station A
RT2
RT1
1000
Example 1) the most proper routing is selected by the office data
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
RT2 is selected by rerouting function after Call Forwarding is successful.
Example 2) the improper routing is selected by the office data
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT1, 2 RT2, 3 RT3
RT1 is selected by rerouting function after Call Forwarding is successful.
Example 3) the improper routing is selected because of alternate routing
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
All trunks of RT2 (the first choice) are busy.
RT1 is selected for alternate routing after Call Forwarding is successful.
Example 4) the improper routing is selected because of the difference of protocol
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
RT2 (the first choice) is ACIS/CCIS line (not Q-SIG or IS-11572 line).
RT1 is selected for alternate routing after Call Forwarding is successful.
For Example 5), see the figure below.
81
82
83
Station A
(2000)
Station C
(4000)
Station B (3000)
Example 5) the rerouting pattern is not changed from that before rerouting function.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 264
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
4. Interactions
Call Forwarding-Supplementary Service
1. When CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY (CCNR) is used with this feature that conforms to Q-SIG:
Note: CCNR available for the Q-SIG network.
SS-CFU: CCNR is not available for the station to be set the SS-CFU.
SS-CFB: CCNR is activated against the forwarding station (called station) even when the feature is set to
the station to be set SS-CFB.
SS-CFNR: CCNR is activated against the forwarded station no matter when (before or after Call Forward-
ing) the CCNR is set.
2. When CALL COMPLETION TO A BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS) is used with this feature that conforms
to Q-SIG:
Note: CCNR available for the Q-SIG network.
SS-CFU: CCNR is not available for the station to be set the SS-CFU
SS-CFB: CCNR is activated against the forwarding station (called station) even when the feature is set to
station to be set SS-CFB (If the forwarding station is busy at that time, CCBS is restricted).
3. When CONNECTED NAME IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (CONP) is used together with this
feature;
SS-CFU: if the name information has been programmed, CONP is not effective and the connected party
name is displayed followed by the name information programmed with SS-CFU data.
SS-CFB: if the name information has been programmed, CONP is not effective and the connected party
name is displayed followed by the name information programmed with SS-CFB data.
SS-CFNR: if the name information has been programmed, CONP is not effective and the connected party
name is displayed following by the name information programmed with SS-CFNR data.
4. When CALL WAITING - TERMINATING [C-12] is used together with this feature;
When automatic CALL WAITING - TERMINATING is set to the station that has already been set this
feature, this feature has priority over CALL WAITING - TERMINATING service and the call is forwarded.
5. When DO NOT DISTURB [D-11D] service is used together with this feature;
SS-CFU: If incoming calls are terminated at the station to be set both features (SS-CFU and DND), the
calls are forwarded by the SS-CFU data.
SS-CFB: If incoming calls are terminated at the station to be set both features (SS-CFB and DND), the
calls are forwarded by the SS-CFB data.
SS-CFNR: If incoming calls are terminated at the station to be set both features (SS-CFNR and DND), the
DND service takes priority and the caller hears the reorder tone.
6. When OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING [O-2] service is used with this feature;
When the call is forwarded to the trunk by the SS-CF service and the destination trunk is busy, OGQ service
is not effective if the Automatic OGQ is available (the call continues to place at the trunk).
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 265
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
7. When the OFF HOOK QUEUEING [O-7] service is used with this feature;
SS-CFNR: When the call is forwarded to the trunk by SS-CFNR and the destination trunk is busy, OFF
HOOK QUEUEING is not available (the call continues to be placed at the trunk).
SS-CF (except SS-CFNR):
When the idle destination picks up the call after the call is queued using OFF HOOK QUEUE-
ING, the calling number display or the name display will not be provided.
8. When the call forwarded by this feature is forwarded byAUTOMATIC ANNOUNCEMENT-PS OUT OF
ZONE/C.F.-PS INCOMING INCOMPLETE service since the call cannot terminate to the destination PS
which is out of zone or whose power is OFF, the calling number display or name display is not provided.
9. This feature requires 24DTI circuit card.
10. The conditions of displayed number at the destination are described below comparing with the CCIS
service.
(a) Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Line;
IS-11572/Q-SIG- the displayed number that indicates the connected party is changed from the called
party (forwarding party) to the destination before the destination answers the call
(at the moment the call is forwarded).
CCIS- the displayed number that indicates the connected party is changed from the called party (for-
warding party) to the destination after the destination answers the call.
(b) Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer;
IS-11572/Q-SIG - the displayed number that indicates the connected party is changed from the called
party (forwarding party) to the destination before the destination answers the call
(at the moment the No Answer timer has been elapsed).
CCIS- the displayed number that indicates the connected party is changed from the called party
(forwarding party) to the destination after the destination answers the call.
Rerouting Function
The calling party name or identification information is not displayed on the LCD of the destination station
(Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP) is not
available) while rerouting function is activated.
CHAPTER 6
Page 266
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
5. Programming
First, assign the data for IS-11572/Q-SIG interface establishment referring to “IS-11572 (LAYER 3
CALL - ETSI VERSION)” in this manual.
•
SS-CFU
STEP 1: ASFC - Assign the service feature restriction class (SFC) for allowing this service.
SFI=7 (Call Forwarding - All Calls) RES=1 (Available)
STEP 2: ATNR - Allow the tenant connection between the station to the station and/or the station to the
attendant console.
TRI=1 (Station within the originating tenant <OGTN> sets Call Forwarding-All Calls /
Busy Line / Don’t Answer to a station within the terminating tenant <TMTN> )
RES=1 (Available)
STEP 3: ARSC - Assign the route restriction class.
STEP 4: ARRC - Allow the route connection between the outgoing route and the incoming route.
STEP 5: ASYD - Assign the system data concerned with this feature.
SYS1, INDEX4, b6. One Burst of Ringing is sent to the station which has been set C.F.-
All Calls service on each an incoming call (analog phones only).
0/1 = Not Required/Required
SYS1, INDEX5, b1-3. Maximum number of times Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line/
All Calls occurrences.
Note: This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX 69, bit 7 is assigned as “1” (Multiple CallForwarding - Busy Line/
All Calls is in Service)
SYS1, INDEX69, b7. Multiple Call forwarding - Busy Line/All Calls
0/1 = Out/In Service
SYS1, INDEX248, b7. Tone to be sent out when the handset is off-hook at the station on
which C.F.-All Calls service is set.
0/1 = Dial Tone (DT)/Special Dial Tone (SPDT)
SYS2, INDEX1, b3. Toll Restriction for Speed Calling Station/Group services
0/1 = Required/Not Required
SYS2, INDEX1, b7. Speed Calling Override Service (System basis)
0/1 = Required/Not Required
SYS2, INDEX6, b4. Call Origination Restriction of Station upon setting C.F.-All Calls
0/1 = Required/Not Required
STEP 6: ANPD - Reserve a number level for the feature access and cancel.
STEP 7: ASPA - Assign the access code for the Call Forwarding - All Calls.
SRV=SSC, SID=8 (Call Forwarding - All Calls; Entry)
SRV=SSC, SID=9 (Call Forwarding - All Calls; Cancel)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 267
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
STEP 8: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data.
CDN52 : CTCF - 1 = SS-CT/SS-CF service is effective.
CDN53 : RERT - 1 = Rerouting function is effective.
•
SS-CFB
STEP 1: ASFC - Assign the service feature class.
SFI=9 (Call Forwarding - Busy Line)RES=1 (Available)
STEP 2: ARSC - Assign the route restriction class.
STEP 3: ARRC - Allow the route connection between the outgoing route and the incoming route.
STEP 4: ASYD - Assign the system data concerned with the service.
SYS1, INDEX5, b0. Destination of Call Forwarding - Busy Line and Call Forwarding -
Don’t Answer
0/1 = Same/Separate
SYS1, INDEX5, b1-3. Maximum number of times that Multiple Call Forwarding - All
Calls/Busy Line occurrences.
Note: This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX 69, bit 7 is assigned as “1 (Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line/
All Calls is in service)”.
SYS1, INDEX69, b7. Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line/All Calls
0/1 = Out/In Service
SYS2, INDEX1, b3. Toll Restriction for Speed Calling Station/Group services
0/1 = Required/Not Required
SYS2, INDEX1, b7. Speed Calling Override Service (System basis)
0/1 = Required/Not Required
STEP 5: ANPD - Reserve a number level for the feature access and cancel.
STEP 6: ASPA - Assign the access code for the Call Forwarding - Busy Line.
SRV=SSC, SID=10(Call Forwarding - Busy Line; Entry)
SRV=SSC, SID=11(Call Forwarding - Busy Line; Cancel)
STEP 7: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data.
CDN52 : CTCF - 1 = SS-CT/SS-CF service is effective.
CDN53 : RERT - 1 = Rerouting function is effective.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 268
Revision 1.0
CALL FORWARDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CF) WITH REROUTING
•
SS-CFNR
STEP 1: ASFC - Assign the service feature class.
SFI=8 (Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer)RES=1(Available)
STEP 2: ATNR - Allow the tenant connection between the station and the station and/or the station and the
attendant console.
Assign the RES=1 (Not restricted) at the following indexes.
TRI= 0 (Station within the outgoing tenant <OGTN> calls to a station within the terminat-
ing tenant <TMTN>)
TRI= 1 (Station within the outgoing tenant <OGTN> sets Call Forwarding-All Calls /
Busy Line / Don’t Answer to a station within the terminating tenant <TMTN>)
TRI= 3 (Attendant Console within the outgoing tenant <OGTN> sets Call Forwarding-All
Calls for a station within the terminating tenant <TMTN> (Call Forwarding-All
Calls set/cancel by ATT))
STEP 3: ARSC - Assign the route restriction class.
STEP 4: ARRC - Allow the route connection between the outgoing route and the incoming route.
STEP 5: ASYD - Assign the system data concerned with the service.
SYS1, INDEX5, b0. Destination of Call Forwarding - Busy Line and Call Forwarding -
Don’t Answer
0/1 = Same/Separate
SYS1, INDEX139, b0-b6. No Answer Timer for station to station, DID, and Tie Line
calls. Time value setting is MTC × TC sec.
SYS1, INDEX140, b0-b6. No Answer Timer for Recall on Call Transfer: the duration for
which a call will ring at the transfer destination before it will recall to the transferring
party. The timer value is effective when INDEX69, b0=0. Timer value setting is MTC (0-
15) × TC (2 or 8) sec.
SYS2, INDEX6, b7. C.F.-Don’t Answer service to be set at the destination when the call is
transferred by the attendant console in the way of BLIND TRANSFER.
0/1 = Out of Service (Recall to Attendant Console)/In Service
STEP 6: ANPD - Reserve a number level for the feature access and cancel.
STEP 7: ASPA - Assign the access code for the Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer.
SRV=SSC, SID=12 (Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer; Entry)
SRV=SSC, SID=13 (Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer; Cancel)
STEP 8: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data.
CDN52 : CTCF - 1 = SS-CT/SS-CF service is effective.
CDN53 : RERT - 1 = Rerouting function is effective.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 269
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
C-159 CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
1. General Description
This feature provides CALL TRANSFER activated to be followed by IS-13869/ETS 300 260 protocol (SS-CT).
By using this feature, the station can hold the handling call to transfer to the remote terminal. Also, rerouting
function is activated with SS-CT service.
The functions of this feature are as follows.
1. Call Transfer-Supplementary Service
Example) Station A:
Station B:
Calling Party
Called Party (Forwarding Party)
Forwarded Party
Station C:
(a) When the intermediate party is disconnected after the forwarded party answers the call.
(1) Station B holds a call from Station A.
(2) Station B calls to Station C and Station C answers the call.
(3) Station A connects to Station B as Station B is disconnected
(b) When the intermediate party disconnects before the forwarded party answers the call (BLIND
TRANSFER)
(1) Station B holds a call from Station A.
(2) Station B places a call to Station C
(3) Station B disconnects and the tone that Station A receives changes from the hold tone to the ring
back tone.
(4) Station A connects with Station C.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 270
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
2. Rerouting Function
To prevent keeping a hold on the unnecessary line, the line from the calling party to the forwarded
destination is newly established when SS-CT service is successful. LCDs of stations concerned with this
service are shown below.
Station A:
Station B:
Station C:
Calling Party
Called Party (Forwarding Party)
Forwarded Party
1) Station A originates a call to Station B. LCD display on Station A is “3001” and LCD display on Station B
term
term
is “TRANSFER” (D
Series E) or “XFR” (D
Series III).
CALL
Station A
(2001)
Station B
(3001)
Station C
(4001)
2) Station B transfers the call to Station C and Station C answers the call.
term
LCD display on Station A is “3001”, LCD display on Station B is “TRANSFER” (D
Series E) or “XFR”
term
(D
Series III) and LCD display on Station C is “3001”.
CALL
TRANSFER
Station A
(2001)
Station B
(3001)
Station C
(4001)
3) As Station B is released from the connection, a new call is automatically originated from Station A
to Station C and the line used for Station A through Station C is reestablished.
LCD display on Station A is “4001” and “2001” is displayed on Station C's LCD.
NEWLY
ESTABLISHED LINK
DISCONNECTED
Station A
(2001)
Station B
(3001)
Station C
(4001)
: IS-11572 or Q-SIG
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 271
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
2. Operating Procedure
This feature is operated when the station is in the two-party connection
[Set the service]
1. The station user performs the switch hook flash; the special dial tone is heard.
2. Dial the destination’s number; the ring back tone is heard.
3. The destination party answers the call.
4. The station user replaces the handset.
Note
5. The calling party and the transferred party are connected.
Note: The user may replace the handset before the transferred party answering the call. In that case, the caller
hears the ring back tone in place of the hold tone.
3. Service Conditions
Call Transfer-Supplementary Service
term
1. This service is available for D
, the analog station, ISDN terminal, PCS terminal, or the attendant console.
2. This feature is available with IS-11572/ETS 300 172 interface.
3. Available Bearer Capability information for this service is speech and 3.1 kHz audio.
4. When the transferring party gets into a conversation with the destination party after the destination answers
the call, the switch hook flash may use to switch the connected party to the held party.
5. If the transferring party hangs up before the destination answers the call (transfers in the way of BLIND
TRANSFER) and transferred party is busy, the transferring party will be recalled.
6. If the call is transferred to release from the connection after the destination answers the call, the switchhook
flash is available for the transferring party to place back the original connection since the destination is busy.
(One digit dialing is not available for this operation)
7. When the transferring station is released from the connection after flashing the switchhook and hears the
special dial tone (before dialing the destination’s number), the caller hears the reorder tone. In this case, the
transferring station is not recalled.
8. When the call transfer service is not available because of Register Prepause Timer time out or Register Inter-
Digit Timer time out, the transferring party hears the reorder tone. In this case, the transferring party can
perform the switchhook flash to reconnect with the calling party.
9. In this service, incoming call via the COT cannot be transferred by the way of BLIND TRANSFER service
(When IS-11572 is interworked with ACIS, this service to be operated by BLIND TRANSFER method is
not available).
10. When the service is used to be interworked with the interface except IS-11572 or Q-SIG, the displayed
number will not be changed at the calling station (The display is the same as before the SS-CT service is
activated and the LCD of calling station displays the called station (forwarding party)). However, the LCD
of destination displays the calling station.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 272
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
Rerouting Function
1. Rerouting function is available when:
(a) SS-CT service is available.
(b) Bearer Capability information of speech or 3.1 kHz audio is available for rerouting function
(Unrestricted digital data cannot be forwarded and the line is disconnected).
(c) Transmission speed rate is 64 kbps.
term
(d) The calling party, the called party, and the destination station are D
or analog station.
(e) Another service is activated on the calling party, the called party, and the destination station.
2. Rerouting function is also available for the call in the example below.
Calling Station (Station A): Office Code = 80, Station no. = 1000
Called Station (Station B): Office Code = 82, Station no. = 3000
Destination Station (Station C): Office Code = 83, Station no. = 4000
C.T. is set to “83-4000”
Station B
3000
Station C
3000
: Q-SIG/IS-11572
: ACIS/CCIS
82
81
83
RT2
Station A
1000
80
RT1
[routing selection data to Office Ò83Ó]
st choice RT is RT1
2nd choice RT is RT2
1
1) Station A originates a call to Station B through Office “81”.
(the call is routed to Station B through ACIS/CCIS and Q-SIG/IS-11572 line)
2) Station B transfer the call from Station A to Station C, Station B is released from the connection.
3) New line from Office “81” to “83” is established for the call (RT1 is the first choice routing from Office “81”
to “83”). Rerouted line connection is Office “80” → Office “81” → Office “83”
Note: ACIS/CCIS line (Office “80” to “81”) is not reestablished and Station C's number is not displayed on
the LCD of Station A belonging to Office “80”.
3. When interworking through FCCS link, rerouting function is activated with no restriction.
4. When station-to-station connection is established between a calling party and a called party, the called party
and a forwarded party, rerouting function is not activated.
5. When rerouting function is not available or the activation is failed, Call Transfer service is activated without
rerouting function.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 273
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
6. Reestablished route is decided by the routing selection pattern data programmed at the office where the
calling party is accommodated or the gateway PBX office to the called station. Therefore, the improper route
or the route that is the same as before rerouting function may be selected depending on the office data.
For Examples 1) through 4), see the figure below.
C.T. to Station C
Station B
Station C
3000
82
81
83
84
2000
RT3
Station A
RT2
RT1
1000
Example 1) the most proper routing is selected by the office data
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
RT2 is selected by rerouting function after Call Transfer is successful.
Example 2) the improper routing is selected by the office data
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT1, 2 RT2, 3 RT3
RT1 is selected by rerouting function after Call Transfer is successful.
Example 3) the improper routing is selected because of alternate routing
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
All trunks of RT2 (the first choice) are busy.
RT1 is selected for alternate routing after CallTransfer is successful.
Example 4) the improper routing is selected because of the difference of protocol
st
nd
rd
Routing selection data to Office “83” programmed at Office “81”: 1 RT2, 2 RT1, 3 RT3
RT2 (the first choice) is ACIS/CCIS line (not Q-SIG or IS-11572 line).
RT1 is selected for alternate routing after CallTransfer is successful.
For Example 5), see the figure below.
81
82
83
Station A
(2000)
Station C
(4000)
Station B (3000)
Example 5) the rerouting pattern is not changed from that before rerouting function.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 274
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
4. Interactions
Call Transfer-Supplementary Service
1. When CALL PARK [C-29] is used with this feature:
The call parked by CALL PARK feature cannot be transferred by the SS-CT service. While, the station
operated CALL PARK can use the SS-CT service for the another incoming call.
2. When CALL HOLD [C-6] is used with this feature:
The call held by CALL HOLD feature cannot be transferred by the SS-CT service.
3. When STEP CALL [S-13] is used with this feature:
When the destination to be transferred with the SS-CT service is busy, a new call can be originated using
STEP CALL.
4. When OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING [O-2, 2D]/OFF HOOK QUEUEING [O-7, 7D]/INTER-OFFICE
OFF HOOK QUEUEING [I-11] service is used with this feature;
When the call is transferred to the trunk by the SS-CT service, those services cannot be set against the busy
trunk.
5. When Service Peg Count function of PEG COUNT [P-7] is used with this feature;
(a) When the transferring party operates to release from the connection after the station answers the call,
this service is included in “CALL TRANSFER - ALL CALLS” service count.
(b) When the SS-CT service is operated in the way of BLIND TRANSFER service, this service is not
counted.
6. This feature requires 24DTI circuit card.
7. When operating this service in the way of BLIND TRANSFER, the number that indicates the connected
party at the calling party’s LCD are different between CALL TRANSFER service activated through IS-
11572/Q-SIG and the service activated through CCIS.
•
IS-11572/Q-SIG - The display of the calling party is changed from the transferring party’s number
(caller party’s number) to the destination’s number at the moment the transferring party releases from
the connection.
•
CALL TRANSFER to be activated through CCIS - the LCD display of the calling party is changed after
the transferring party answers the call.
Rerouting Function
1. The calling party name or identification information is not displayed on the LCD of the destination station
while rerouting function is activated.
2. When the mediate user originates a call to the station on which Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is set and
releases before the destination station answers the call, Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is not effective while
rerouting function is activated.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 275
Revision 1.0
CALL TRANSFER SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE (SS-CT) WITH REROUTING
5. Programming
Assign the data for IS-11572/Q-SIG interface establishment referring to “IS-11572 (Layer 3 specifications for
inter-PBX signaling protocol)/Q-SIG (Circuit Switched Basic Call-ETSI Version)” on this manual.
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the system data concerned with this feature.
SYS1, INDEX17, b4. Blind Transfer to Attendant 0/1 = Out/In Service
SYS1, INDEX69, b0. Return transferred call to transferring party after Recall Timer
expires
0/1 = Recall/No Recall (when C.F. - Don’t Answer is set at the transfer destination)
SYS1, INDEX140, b0-b6. The duration for which a call will ring at the transfer
destination before it will recall to the transferring party. (Assign this data when ASFC,
SFI103=0)
SYS1, INDEX247, b0-b6. No Answer timer for Blind Transfer station. (Assign this data
when ASFC, SFI103=1)
STEP 2: ASFC - Assign the service feature class (SFC) for allowing this service.
SFI103 (Assign the timer value of No Answer Timer for BLIND TRANSFER TO
STATION)
0=followed by Index 140/Index 247 assigned by ASYD.
SFI104 (Processing in a case when the transfer destination does not answer within a
predetermined period of time.)
Note: This data is available when SYS1, INDEX69, b0=1
0=The transfer destination station rings continuously
1=C.F. - Don’t Answer is executed if it is set at the transfer destination
STEP 3: ARRC - Allow the alternative route connection between the outgoing trunk and the incoming trunk.
STEP 4: ARNP - Assign the route number “0” for the self office.
Note: This command data is not necessary for the closed numbering system.
STEP 5: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data.
CDN52 : CTCF - 1 = SS-CT/SS-CF service is effective.
CDN53 : RERT - 1 = Rerouting function is effective.
CHAPTER 6
Page 276
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
I-42
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
1. General Description
This feature allows inter-PBX link using Layer 3 signalling protocol supporting circuit mode bearer services
(ISO/IEC IS-11572). This feature has the following functions:
•
•
•
Outgoing/Incoming Call Connection
Tandem Connection
Inter-PBX Link
This feature is available for the PBX with the PA-30PRTC circuit card.
PBX
PBX
IS-11572
(Private ISDN)
PRT
PRT
1. Physical Interface
A maximum of 63 channels are to be controlled by a single Data Link channel. This feature, however, does
not support D-CHANNEL BACKUP.
Logical interface
PBX
DTI
42B+D
DTI
4B+D
Logical interface
Legend:
: D-channel
: B-channel
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 277
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
2. Bearer Capability
•
•
The transfer rate is 64 kbps/384 kbps/1,536 kbps/64 kbps × n (since Release 4) only.
This feature provides the following Bearer Capabilities:
– Speech
– Unrestricted Digital Information
– Restricted Digital Information (only in case of interworking)
– 3.1 kHz audio
– Unrestricted Multi-Rate
•
•
At terminating PBX, received bearer capabilities are converted as shown below.
Speech, 3.1 kHz audio, 7 kHz audio → Speech
Unrestricted/Restricted Digital Information, Video → Unrestricted Digital Information
Table 6-1 Transparency of Bearer Capability When Interworking with C.O./Tie Line
BEARER CAPABILITY
3.1k
AUDIO
UNRESTRICTED
DIGITAL
RESTRICTED
DIGITAL
SPEECH
7.1k AUDIO
VIDEO
INTERWORKING
ISDN → IS-11572
–
–
Converted to
3.1k audio
Converted to
Unrestricted digital
IS-11572 → ISDN
Analog C.O. → IS-11572
IS-11572 → Analog C.O.
CCIS → IS-11572
C.O. Line
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Converted to
3.1k audio
Converted to
Unrestricted digital Unrestricted digital
Converted to
IS-11572 → CCIS
Tie Line
ACIS → IS-11572
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
IS-11572 → ACIS
–
: Transparent
–
: Not Available
CHAPTER 6
Page 278
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
3. Connectivity
IS-11572 is available for the following connection and interworking with the other networks.
Note that connection test is required when the NEC’s PBX and other manufacturer’s PBX coexists in an
IS-11572 network.
Analog C.O. Line
ISDN
IS-11572
Network
NEC
IS-11572
ACIS
Existing Office
CCIS
Other Manufacturer
Existing Office
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 279
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
•
Connectivity between IS-11572 and terminal equipment is shown below.
CONNECTIVITY REMARKS
BRI Station → IS-11572
IS-11572 → BRI Station
PRI Station → IS-11572
IS-11572 → PRI Station
term
IS-11572 → D
term
D
→ IS-11572
Analog Station → IS-11572
IS-11572 → Analog Station
: Available
4. Calling/Called Party Number Information
•
•
As a calling/called party number, a maximum of 32 digits can be transmitted and received.
(Note that the contents of the calling/called party number display vary depending on the type of
terminal.)
When different signalling systems are involved, transparency of calling/called party number is as
shown below:
TYPE OF NETWORK
TRANSPARENCY
CCIS Network
The former 16 digits are transferred.
Transparent
ISDN Network
ISDN Private Network
Transparent
term
•
D
or analog telephone user can select whether to send the calling number or not.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
CHAPTER 6
Page 280
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
3. Service Conditions
1. The multi-rate bearer service is available.
Multi-rate bearer service: Desirably multiplied value of 64 (64 kbps × “n”-desired number) is available for
the data transmission speed in addition to the current speed such as 384K (64K
× 6), 1536K (64K × 24) and 1920K (64K × 30).
The following service conditions are concerned with the multi-rate bearer service.
(a) Routing data must be assigned per physical interface (PRT/DTI).
(b) Overlap sending (LCRS) is not provided with this feature.
(c) Multi-rate bearer service is provided for the PBXs connecting directly with the Q-SIG interface. (If
the PBXs are connected with the different interface such as the interface defined by Q.931/Q.931-a or
CCIS, only H0/H1 service (transfer rate is 384 kbps/1.5 Mbps) is available.)
2. The User-to-User Signaling (UUS) can be sent via Q-SIG interface.
The following conditions are for the UUS transmission.
(a) The maximum data capacity for the UUS is 128 bytes and the latter part of excessive data is
automatically omitted.
(b) The following messages for call establishment/clearing may include the UUS.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup
Alerting
Connect
Progress
Disconnect
Release
Release Complete
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 281
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
(c) The connection patterns for the UUS transmission are shown in the figure below.
Pattern 1: The ISDN tandem connection
Note: Either ISDN(a) or ISDN(b) is Q-sig/IS-11572 interface.
PBX
PBX
PBX
ISDN(a)
ISDN(b)
ISDN
ISDN
message
message
(UUS)
(UUS)
Pattern 2: The interface used in the terminating office is Q-sig/IS-11572.
PBX
PBX
Q-sig/
IS-11572
ISDN
terminal
ISDN
ISDN
message
message
(UUS)
(UUS)
Pattern 3: The interface used in the originating office is Q-sig/IS-11572.
PBX
PBX
Q-sig/
IS-11572
ISDN
terminal
ISDN
ISDN
message
message
(UUS)
(UUS)
CHAPTER 6
Page 282
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
4. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the following data.
SYS-1 Index 186 bit6=1 (ISDN/CCIS is in service)
187=00 Hex
220 bit6=0 (ISDN is in service)
STEP 2: Assign the numbering plan data for call origination.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the route data for Bch and Dch at each physical interface.
B-channel route data
D-channel route data
CDN
2 (ONSG)
4 (INSG)
5 (TF)
6 (TCL)
7 (L/T)
=
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
3
4
1
2
CDN
2 (ONSG)
4 (INSG)
5 (TF)
6 (TCL)
7 (L/T)
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
3
4
1
8 (RLP)
15 (LSG)
28 (ANS)
30 (PAD)
31 (OGRL)
32 (ICRL)
= 12
15 (LSG)
= 13
=
=
=
=
1
4 Note 1
30 (PAD)
31 (OGRL)
32 (ICRL)
34 (GUARD) =
45 (A/D)
=
=
=
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
34 (GUARD) =
45 (A/D)
=
=
50 (DPLY)
65 (INT)
66 (DC)
=
1 Note 3
= 10
= 15
65 (INT)
= 10
113 (UUI)
118 (BOB)
=
=
1 Note 4
1 Note 5
118 (BOB)
=
1 Note 5
Note 1: Depending on the level diagram of the network. Data “4” is for standard.
Note 2: Note that each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of call origination.
TRKS=0 (When PRT/DCH is set as “User side” by DIP switch.)
TRKS=1 (When PRT/DCH is set as “Net side” by DIP switch.)
IS-11572
PRT
PRT
Dip SW : User side
ARTD : TRKS = 0
Dip SW : Net side
ARTD : TRKS = 1
Note 3: Assign “1” when the number display on LCD of terminal is required.
Note 4: Assign “1” when the User-to-User signaling notification is required.
Note 5: Assign “1” when the multi-rate bearer service is used.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 283
Revision 1.0
IS-11572 (LAYER 3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTER-PBX SIGNALING PROTOCOL)
STEP 4: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data.
INTD = 1 (IS-11572)
STEP 5: ATRK - Assign Bch trunks. Note that the LEN of Dch trunk should be assigned after STEP 9:
ACIC2 command assignment.
STEP 6: MBTK - Make idle Bch trunks.
STEP 7: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) for both Bch and Dch at each physical interface.
Note: Same PC (not existing PC for CCIS) must be assigned for both Bch and Dch.
STEP 8: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch Handler).
(Refer to the following example)
CSCG=130 (Even No.) CICG No.= 0
CCH= 00004
00004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
00004
PIM0
05 07
04 06
Group No.
Note: Bch location is not necessary. (DCH location only)
STEP 9: ACIC 1- Assign CSCG
PC=xxx
CSCG=Even No. (130-254)
STEP 10: ACIC 2- Assign CIC No.
PC=xxx
CIC(1~999)
LENS (for speech channel)
STEP 11: ATRK - Assign the LEN of Dch trunk.
Attention: The circuit card must be initialized after changing data.
Note: The following data is available if necessary.
ASFC - SFI 139: SID to Network - Privacy [COLR]
0 = –
1 = SID to Network - Privacy
CHAPTER 6
Page 284
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSIVERSION)
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION)
1. General Description
Q-4
This feature enable NEC’s PBX to connect to NEC’s PBX or other manufacturer by using Layer 3 protocol for
the signaling for the support of circuit mode bearer services at the Q reference point.
Q-SIG conforms to ETS 300 172.
PBX
PBX
Q-SIG
(Private ISDN)
PRT
PRT
Note 1: ETS 300 172= Private Telecommunication Network (PTN);
Inter-exchange signaling protocol
Circuit mode basic service
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 285
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION)
1. Q reference point
The Q reference point is not expected to be a physical interface but is shown in conceptual terms in the figure
below.
The Q-Sig protocol creates Layer 3 messages for inter-PTN (PBX) signaling.
PBX
PBX
Call
Call
Control
Control
Q
Q
Protocol defined
in this standard
Protocol
Control
Protocol
Control
DTI
DTI
Data Link
Layer
Data Link
Layer
Physical
Layer
Physical
Layer
Layer 2 Note
Layer 3
PBX to PBX
Note: Conforming to Q921-a (PBX-PBX Interface)
Control Plane Protocol Model
CHAPTER 6
Page 286
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSIVERSION)
2. Physical Interface
The physical interface is a 1.5 Mbps digital interface.
A maximum of 60 B-channels are controlled by a single Data Link channel.
Logical interface
PBX
DTI
42B+D
DTI
4B+D
Logical interface
Legend:
: D-channel
: B-channel
3. Interworking with Other Network
Q-SIG is available to the following connection and interworking with the other network.
ISDN
Q-SIG
Network
NEC
ACIS
Q-SIG interface
Existing Office
CCIS
Other Manufacturer
Existing Office
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 287
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION)
4. Example of Message Sequences
<Enbloc Sending/Call Clearing>
OG PBX
SETUP
IC PBX
CALL PROC
ALERT
CONN
CONN ACK
Call Active
DISC
REL
REL COM
<Overlap Sending/Call Clearing>
OG PBX
IC PBX
SETUP (CPN=0123)
SETUP ACK
CPN is "012345678", however SETUP does not
include them completely.
IC PBX shall send SETUP ACK as the request
of CPN.
After receiving SETUP ACK,
OG PBX shall send CPN by
INFORMATION Message.
INFO(CPN=4)
INFO (CPN=5)
INFO (CPN=6)
INFO (CPN=7)
INFO (CPN=8)
After receiving CPN completely by INFO,
IC PBX shall send CALL PROC.
CALL PROC
ALERT
Note: CPN = Called Party Number
CONN
CONN ACK
Call Active
DISC
REL
REL COM
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 288
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSIVERSION)
NON-MANDATORY INFORMATION ELE-
5. Transparency
TYPE OF CALL
MANDATORY INFORMATION ELEMENTS
MENTS
→
→
Q-SIG
ISDN
CCIS
Q-SIG
Conforming to ETS 300 172
Conforming to ETS 300 172
(1) Message Type
(1) Calling Party Number
(2) Calling Party Sub-address
(3) Called Party Sub-address
(4) Cause
(5) Progress Indicator
(6) Low Layer Capability
(7) High Layer Capability
(2) Bearer Capability
(4) Cause
→
→
→
Q-SIG
(5) Call state
→
Q-SIG
(1) Bearer Capability (Speech, Modem)
(2) Called Party Number
(1) Calling Party Number
→
→
Q−SIG
ACIS
(1) Called Party Number (Speech, 3.1k)
None
(1) Message Type
(2) Bearer Capability
(3) Called Party Number
(1) Calling Party Number
(2) Calling Party Sub-address
(3) Called Party Sub-address
(4) Cause
→
→
ISDN term
Q-SIG (4) Cause information element
(5) Call state
(5) Progress Indicator
(6) Low Layer Capability
(7) High Layer Capability
Note 1: When there is no called party number from ISDN, PBX may define the called party number.
Note 2: In the connection from Q-SIG to ISDN, PBX may add or delete digits of the called party number.
Note 3: A digital data communication between CCIS and Q-SIG will be disconnected by High Layer if the at-
tribution mismatch.
Note 4: CCIS in this section means CCIS without ISDN transmitting information (ARTD CDN98 (CI)=0).
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 289
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION)
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Service Conditions
1. (Series 7300 Release 4 software enhancement)The multi-rate bearer service is available.
Multi-rate bearer service: Desirably multiplied value of 64 (64 kbps × “n”-desired number) is available for
the data transmission speed in addition to the current speed such as 384K (64K
× 6), 1536K (64K × 24) and 1920K (64K × 30).
The followings are the service condition concerned with the multi-rate bearer service.
(a) Routing data must be assigned per physical interface (PRT/DTI).
(b) Overlap sending (LCRS) is not provided with this feature.
(c) Multi-rate bearer service is provided for the PBXs connecting directly with the Q-sig interface. (If the
PBXs are connected with the different interface such as the interface defined by Q.931/Q.931-a or
CCIS, only H0/H1 service (transfer rate is 384 kbps/1.5 Mbps) is available.)
2. (Series 7300 Release 4 software enhancement) The User-to-User Signaling (UUS) can be sent via Q-sig
interface.
The followings are the conditions for the UUS transmission.
(a) The maximum data capacity for the UUS is 128 bytes and the latter part of excessive data is
automatically omitted.
(b) The following messages for call establishment/clearing may include the UUS.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup
Alerting
Connect
Progress
Disconnect
Release
Release Complete
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 290
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSIVERSION)
Pattern 1: The ISDN tandem connection
Note: Either ISDN(a) or ISDN(b) is Q-SIG/IS-11572 interface.
PBX
PBX
PBX
ISDN(a)
ISDN(b)
ISDN
message
(UUS)
ISDN
message
(UUS)
Pattern 2: The interface used in the terminating office is Q-SIG/IS-11572.
PBX
PBX
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
ISDN
terminal
ISDN
ISDN
message
(UUS)
message
(UUS)
Pattern 3: The interface used in the originating office is Q-SIG/IS-11572.
PBX PBX
Q-SIG/
IS-11572
ISDN
terminal
ISDN
message
(UUS)
ISDN
message
(UUS)
Figure 6-1 Connection Patterns for UUSTransmission
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 291
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION)
4. Programming
STEP 1: ASYD - Assign the following data.
SYS-1 Index 186 bit6=1 (ISDN/CCIS is in service)
187=00 Hex
220 bit6=0 (ISDN is in service)
STEP 2: Assign the numbering plan data for the originating call.
Note 1: ASPA
LCR (for Enbloc sending)
LCRS (for Overlap sending)
Note 2: Closed Numbering without office code will not allow in Q-SIG Network.
STEP 3: ARTD - Assign the route data for Bch and Dch at each physical interface.
D-channel route data
B-channel route data
CDN
2 (ONSG)
4 (INSG)
5 (TF)
6 (TCL)
7 (L/T)
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
3
4
1
CDN
2 (ONSG)
4 (INSG)
5 (TF)
=
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
3
4
1
2
6 (TCL)
7 (L/T)
8 (RLP)
15 (LSG)
= 13
15 (LSG)
28 (ANS)
30 (PAD)
31 (OGRL)
32 (ICRL)
= 12
=
=
=
=
1
30 (PAD)
31 (OGRL)
32 (ICRL)
34 (GUARD) =
45 (A/D)
=
=
=
7 Note 1
4 Note 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
34 (GUARD) =
45 (A/D)
=
=
50 (DPLY)
65 (INT)
=
1 Note 3
65 (INT)
= 10
= 10
= 15
66 (DC)
113 (UUI)
118 (BOB)
=
=
1 Note 4
1 Note 5
118 (BOB)
=
1 Note 5
Note 1: Depending on the level diagram of the network. Data “4” is for standard.
Note 2: Note that each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of call origination.
TRKS=0 (When PRT/DCH is set as “User side” by DIP switch.)
TRKS=1 (When PRT/DCH is set as “Net side” by DIP switch.)
Q-SIG
PRT
PRT
Dip SW: User side
ARTD: TRKS = 0
Dip SW: Net side
ARTD: TRKS = 1
CHAPTER 6
Page 292
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
Q-SIG (CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSIVERSION)
Note 3: Assign “1” when the number display on LCD of terminal is required.
Note 4: Assign “1” when the User-to-User Signaling notification is required.
Note 5: Assign “1” when the multi-rate bearer service is used.
STEP 4: ARTI - Assign the trunk application data for Bch and Dch as follows.
INTD=0 (Q-SIG)
Note: This data is effective since release 4.
STEP 5: ATRK - Assign Bch trunk data. Note that Dch trunk data should be assigned after STEP 9: ACIC 2
command assignment.
STEP 6: ADPC - Assign PC (Point Code) for both Bch and Dch at each physical interface.
Note: Same PC (not existing PC for CCIS) must be assigned for both Bch and Dch. The Point Code does not
have any relationship to the other PBX’s like in CCIS
STEP 7: ACSC - Assign the location of DCH (Dch Handler).
(Refer to the following example)
CSCG=130 (Even No.) CICG No. = 0
CCH= 0004
0004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0004
0004
0004
0004
0004
PIM0
0004
05 07
04 06
Group
No.
Note: Bch location is not necessary. (DCH location only)
STEP 8: ACIC 1- Assign CSCG
PC=xxx
CSCG=Even No. (130-254)
STEP 9: ACIC 2- Assign CIC No.
PC=xxx
CIC (1~999) LENS (for speech channel)
STEP 10: ATRK - Assign the LEN of Dch trunk.
Attention: The circuit card must be initialized after changing data.
Note: The following data is available if necessary.
ASFC - SFI 139 : SID to Network - Privacy [COLR] for Q-SIG.
0 = −
1 = SID to Network - Privacy
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 293
Revision 1.0
ADVICE OF CHARGE (AOC) - RECEIPT AND DISPLAY OF AOC FROM A FOREIGN Q-SIG NETWORK
A-136 ADVICE OF CHARGE (AOC) - RECEIPT AND DISPLAY OF AOC FROM A FOREIGN Q-SIG
NETWORK
1. General Description
This feature provides the calling station originated a call to ISDN network using Q-SIG/IS-11572 line with the
charge information display sent from the ISDN network. Whether the charge information is displayed or not can
be specified on a station basis.
2. Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
3. Service Conditions
1. This feature is available since Series 7400 (Release 8) software.
term
2. This service is available for the D
and ISDN terminal. Attendant Console is not available for this service.
3. This feature is effective on condition that the call is originated to the ISDN network through ETS 300 172/
IS-11572 line.
4. This feature supports AOC-E only (not applied to AOC-D nor AOC-S).
AOC-S: Charging information at call set-up time
The billing rate is sent to the caller when originating a call.
Also, when the billing rate is changed during the communication, the new information is sent to
the caller.
AOC-E: Charging information at the end of the call
When the call is completed, the charge information is sent to the caller.
AOC-D: Charging information during the call
While the call is in progress, the charge information and the billing rate information are sent to
the caller.
5. This feature supports the total billing information only when the call is completed.
6. Maximum number of digits for the charge display is six digits. When the charge exceeds the maximum
digits, the LCD displays “*999,999”.
7. Charge information of more than ten digits can be displayed on the LCD (number of unit digit is not
displayed). The charge of unit digit is raised to ten digit and charge of decimal places is omitted.
8. This feature is activated only when the charge information is sent from the ISDN network. Therefore, the
call charge is not displayed when dialing the number free of charge.
CHAPTER 6
NDA-24305
Page 294
Revision 1.0
ADVICE OF CHARGE (AOC) - RECEIPT AND DISPLAY OF AOC FROM A FOREIGN Q-SIG NETWORK
4. Interactions
1. When Call Transfer - All Calls service/Blind Transfer Service is activated with this feature, the call charge
is not sent to the calling station. However, when Call Transfer - All Calls is activated with this feature, the
call charge is sent to the forwarding station.
2. When Call Forwarding - Busy Line [C-2], Call Forwarding - All Calls [C-5] is activated with this feature,
the call charge is sent to the calling station.
3. When Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer [C-5] is activated with this feature, the call charge is not sent.
4. When C.F. - PS Incoming Incomplete is activated with this feature, the call charge is not sent.
5. When Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)/Connected Name Identification Presentation
(CONP) [C-153] is provided with this feature, the call charge is not sent.
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 295
Revision 1.0
ADVICE OF CHARGE (AOC) - RECEIPT AND DISPLAY OF AOC FROM A FOREIGN Q-SIG NETWORK
5. Example of Message Sequence
Some examples of message sequence for this service are shown below.
Station A calls to Station B and the two stations are connected.
Station A
ETSI/
ISDN
IS-11572
network
Station B
(1)
Message Sequence of charge information sent when the call is disconnected from a called user
Output Gateway
PINX
ISDN public
Network
Originating PINX
Mediate PINX
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
chargeRequest. inv
chargeRequest. inv
CALLPROC
CALLPROC
CALLPROC
ALERT
ALERT
ALERT
chargeRequest. res
chargeRequest. res
CONN
DISC
CONN
CONN
DISC
DISC
(charge information)
aocFinal. inv
aocFinal. inv
(2) Message Sequence of charge information sent when the call is disconnected from a calling user
Output Gateway
PINX
ISDN public
Network
Originating PINX
Mediate PINX
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
chargeRequest. inv
chargeRequest. inv
CALLPROC
CALLPROC
CALLPROC
ALERT
ALERT
ALERT
chargeRequest. res
chargeRequest. res
CONN
CONN
CONN
FAC
FAC
getFinalcharge. inv
DISC
DISC
REL
getFinalcharge. inv
DISC
(charge information)
aocFinal. inv
aocFinal. inv
CHAPTER 6
Page 296
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
ADVICE OF CHARGE (AOC) - RECEIPT AND DISPLAY OF AOC FROM A FOREIGN Q-SIG NETWORK
6. Programming
STEP 2: ASFC – Assign the service feature class to be allowed this service to each station.
SFI109 (Call charge notification to ISDN terminal), RES=1 (In service)
SFI175 (AOC), RES=1 (In service)
NDA-24305
CHAPTER 6
Page 297
Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
CHAPTER 6
Page 298
NDA-24305
Revision 1.0
|